Home

User`s Manual

Contents

1. lt gt ly gt x lt gt lt gt lt gt xl lt gt x a 110 Permit m Disabled w Disabled w Disabled 7 Disabled v Enabled 0 20 Permit Disabled 7 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 7 0 3 0 Permit x Disabled 7 Disabled ww Disabled Disabled 4 Enabled x 0 4 0 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled 7 Enabled 7 0 5 0 Permit e Disabled x Disabled y Disabled w Disabled w Enabled x 0 46 0 Permit w Disabled Lx Disabled Disabled 7 Disabled 7 Enabled 7 0 47 0 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 7 Enabled x 0 48 0 Permit Disabled 7 Disabled 7 Disabled Disabled e Enabled r 0 49 0 Permit Disabled 7 Disabled ww Disabled Disabled v Enabled 0 50 0 Permit w Disabled 7 Disabled 7 Disabled Disabled ix Enabled 0 510 Peritz Disabled w Disabled L7 Disabled Disabled _ Enabled 7 0 52 0 Permit we Disabled ye Disabled Disabled w Disabled y Enabled w 0 49 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID Select the policy to ap
2. Relay Mode Disabled y Relay Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Information Mode Disabled y Relay Information Policy Replace v Parameter description Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled 229 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if
3. The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running 249 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is rea
4. 41 Disable 7 42 Disable 7 43 Disable 44 Disable 45 Disable 46 Disable 47 Disable w 48 Disable Sa o a ys PO O o MIN j olf o MIN M o J Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row e Delay Mode Turn on off the power delay function e Delay Time 0 300sec When rebooting the PoE port will start to provide power to the PD when it out of delay time e Button Apply Click Apply to apply the change 138 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 9 4 Auto Checking This page allows the user to specify the auto detection parameters to check the linking status between PoE ports and PDs When it detected the fail connect will reboot remote PD automatically Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Auto Checking in the web interface Click Configuration PoE and Auto checking Enable the Ping Check function Specify the PD s IP address checking interval retry time failure action and reboot time Click Apply to apply the change PON Figure 3 9 4 The POE Auto Checking Port Ping IP Address Interval Time sec Retry Time Failure Log Failure Action Reboot T
5. Non Edge I aa a Auto w 46 0 au x 128 5 Non Eage OO O Auto mw 47 O auto Pl 128 v Non Edge a a O Auto x aE auto w 128 w Non Edge y aja T Auto y 49 O sto w 128 Non Edge E a a a Auto y 5 O Auto 128 Ez Non Edge 7 y u a a Auto X 51 10 ao f 128 7 Non Edge aja O auto mw auto PAL 128 v Non Edge a a O Auto y 80 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on A
6. The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the 215 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al range 100 to 86400 e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 216 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Chapter 4 Security This chapter describes all of the switch security configuration tasks to enhance the security of local network including IP Source Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping AAA and etc 4 1 IP Source Guard The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch 4 1 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web
7. Figure2 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SNMP System Configuration page SNMP State The term SNMP here The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de activation of SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation Disable Disable SNMP state operation Default Enable e EnginelD SNMPv3 engine ID syntax 0 9 a f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet can t input 00 IF change the Engine ID that will clear all original user 25 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 2 Configuration The function is used to configure SNMP communities To enable a new community statistics please check the button W and choice lt Enable gt to configure SNMP function Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Configuration 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Click Apply Figure2 6 2 The SNMP Configuration Get Community public__ Set Community private 26 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 3 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and UserName is unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number
8. Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted e Buttons Apply Click to Apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 119 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 8 2 LLDP Neighbours This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbours 1 Click LLDP Neighbours 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 8 2 The LLDP Neighbours information LI Refresh Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Desc System Capabilities System Description Management Address O Note If your network without any device supports LLDP then the table will show No LLDP neighbour information found Parameter description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port eo System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the ne
9. Step2 If not already in place attach one end of a cable segment to the back of the patch panel where the punch down block is located and the other end to a modular wall outlet Step3 Label the cables to simplify future troubleshooting See Cable Labeling and Connection Records on page 29 Figure 17 Network Wiring Connections Equipment Rack Switch side view 1 f 1 f 1 f IN i w A S Patch Down Block Patch Panel Wall 4 6 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al System Configuration This chapter describes the entire basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and any manage of the Switch e g Time Account IP Syslog and SNMP 2 1 System Information After you login the switch shows you the system information This page is default and tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact Device Name System Up Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Address Host Mac Address Device Port RAM Size Flash Size and With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports good and so on T
10. soo kbps a C1 500 kbps w Parameter description eo Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled 197 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Controls whether the storm control is enabled on this switch port o Rate Controls the rate for the storm control The default value is500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 10000 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps o Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 198 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 13 WRED The section allows user to configure the WRED function for the switch This page allows you to configure the Random Early Detection RED settings for queue 0 to 5 RED cannot be applied to queue 6 and 7 Through different RED configuration for the queues QoS classes it is possible to obtain Weighted Random Early Detection WRED operation between queues The settings are global for all ports in the stack switch The displayed settings are Web Interface To configure the WRED Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration WRED Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or d
11. 286 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Stand
12. Authorization Fallback to Local Authorization Accounting 245 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Figure 4 5 3 3 The RADIUS Configuration Enabled 4 2 3 4 5 Parameter description Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured 246 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al RADIUS Authentication Serve
13. e Delete Check lt Delete gt entry then check lt Apply gt button the entry will be delete e Trap Version You may choose v1 v2c or v3 trap eo Server IP To assign the SNMP Host IP address e UDP Port To assign Port number Default 162 e Community Security Name The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 e Security Level 35 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Indicates what kind of message will send to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Security Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Authentication Protocol You can choose MD5 or SHA for authentication Authentication Password The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 Privacy Protocol You can set DES encryption for UserName Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 36 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic network configuration tasks which include the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g VLANs QoS IGMP ACLs and PoE etc and any setting of the Switch 3 1 Port The section describ
14. use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 263 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Maintenance This chapter describes all of the switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of local network including Restart Device Firmware upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 5 1 Restart Device This section describes how to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restart Device 2 Click Yes Figure 5 1 1 The Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Parameter description e Restart Device You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally e Buttons Yes Click to Yes then the device will restart No Click to undo any restart action 264 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 2 Firmware This sec
15. 2012 Revision Al 5 4 Export Import This section describes how to export and import the Switch configuration Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format 5 4 1 Export Config This section describes to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure a Export Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save configuration 2 Save the file in your device Figure 5 4 1 The Restore the Backup Configuration Save configuration File Download Do you want to open or save this file 5 Name config xml Type XML Document 49 4KB From 192 168 20 22 E useful some files can potentially ot trust the source do not open or 16 Desktop A My Documents 8 My Computer My Recent E My Network Places Documents 31000913 20111001 e Desktop adisc_change_v2_5 9 when download completes T Goon Fale My Documents 000002 File name Save as type My Network Parameter description Save Click the Save button to store the Configuration to the PC or Server 272 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 4 2 Import Config This section describes to export the Swith Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interfac
16. 2012 Revision Al Power Supply Configuration e Primary Power Supply W The switch can have PoE power supplies It is used as power source For being able to determine the amount of power the PD may use it must be defined what amount of power the power sources can deliver e Retry Time The period in seconds for trying to turn on a overloaded PoE port Ethernet Port Configuration Port This is the logical port number for this row PoE Mode The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port Enabled Enables PoE IEEE 802 3at Class 4 PDs limited to 30W eo Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the highest port number O Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device O Note If you want to set the Port support EEE802 3at then you can set the Maximum allowed value is 30W o Reset Reset the specific PoE port e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 135 Publication date Dec 2012 Revisi
17. 2012 Revision Al e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1 X e MAC based Auth Selected Counters e Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of t
18. 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 105 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes that you could to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function On the UI that you could add new filtering group and safety policy Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface Click Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Click the Add new Filtering Group Specify the Filtering Groups with entries per page Click the apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values akRWNM Figure 3 7 3 The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Filtering Groups Add new Filtering Group Apply
19. 4 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Communities in the web interface Click SNMP Communities Click Add new community Specify the SNMP communities parameters Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset nan Figure 2 6 3 The SNMPv1 v2 Communities Security Configuration Delete Community UserName Source IP Source Mask Apply Delete Delete Community Add new community Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string UserName The UserName access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The length of UserName string is restricted to 1 32 o Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask o Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask 27 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 4 Users The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is UserName To create a new UserName account please check lt Add new user gt button and enter the use
20. Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Parameters The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter Pv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter Pv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file eo IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value eo IPTTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero lPv4 frames with a Time to Live fiel
21. CHAPTER 3 GONEFIGURATION r been oan Os 37 CEANA dO Pilea tears At teh tS e ck E EFE a ls Ad ee cece dl td A e aaa ee ee te 37 B21 21 CONMGUIATON iia ta TI e A a a At ata 37 SN IR AR PEE NAE ATEO ENNA aS A OREN DAAT ESRAR 40 3 1 3 Traffic OVOIVIOW 10cccccccccccccceneececececeeeusensecececeseaeeaerseseseseseauensetecesessaeenersecesessssannseseeessssssenes 41 3 1 4 Detailed StatistiCS oooononncocininicicicioonconicinnnoconononicinnnnnonononanancnnnnnnnnnonan cnn caco nn nnanncncananinnnns 43 IS DQOS SIALISUCS it IS NE IS iaa 46 3 1 6 SFP InforMati0N ETIANI ETNE nono nnnn AAEE 47 O Ei earn A ME ce Dr PRE AA A A E AE 49 DEED OMS RE Shea bo Bt Sele Be Me tits a ee ek ae AE 49 A e E Ay E A esate oS E RN O E TRATO 51 3 2 3 Access Control LiSt cccccccccececeeececeeececeeeeeeececeeeseseseeeeeseeeseeeseteseteeeeeteseceteceeeeeteeececeteseseeeeesess 53 AS A EA AE EEE tet bas Sandee Ses Shred ta Sade E EE 62 3 9 AGGREGATION ot A AAA E aai etter 64 BUST SlaliC TUN A ta ii iaa baii 64 9 0 SA SA A Vite onde a A a a A ule dateu Miers 64 BG S fat Cy A EAA eR ES PR PR a IE A A 66 3 38 21 Configura Mei vie A ibe ae ee 66 9 3 2 2 System Status ii cei eee ee Ae ee tee 68 3295220 POSTURA E E EAE EE ie Beat 69 323 2 4 Port StatstiGs A Be Atle ccd da thd tae A E eee 71 3 4 SPANNING TREE 45 A a a A Ai alban 73 3 4 T Bridge Settings iii A eel A A ieee 73 2 4 2 MST Mapping e ERE Aa AA A dnl Riise aint Rani 76 3 433 MST PHONICS ccc iad
22. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 10 The QoS Control List Configuration z z Ao E e e te Ga Et a Parameter description eo QCE Indicates the index of QCE eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE eo Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are 191 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames eo SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address eo DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any eo VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any e PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any e DEI Drop Elig
23. Policy Bitmask When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ethrnet type Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames ma
24. Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS
25. Reset Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings You can evoke to enable the port to join filtering Group e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 106 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 4 Status The section describes when you complete the MLD Snooping and how to display the MLD Snooping Status and detail information It will help you to find out the detail information of MLD Snooping status Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status Figure 3 6 4 The MLD Snooping Status ere ce Parameter description eo VLANID 107 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The VLAN ID of the entry Querier Version Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number
26. When the function is enabled all non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Port Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 163 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 12 2 OUI The section describes to Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN OUI Table in the web interface 1 Select Add new entry Delete in the Voice VLAN OUI table 2 Specify Telephony OUI Description 3 Click Apply Figure 3 12 2 The Voice VLAN OUI Table Voice VLAN OUI Table Delete Telephony OUI Description 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones dl 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 0f e2 H3C phones d 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0
27. and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Length ping count and ping interval 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 1 The ICMP Ping ICMP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 PingLength 56 Ping Count 5 Ping Interval 1 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMPv6 packet Values range from Osecond to 30 seconds o Start This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press start ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PINGE server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 274 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received
28. o 4 unn 2 ans L a nse 4 Ves y L a Vnunos E 6 umsat 7 nse 8 unes 9 uns 40 uns UB uno 46 unes Y ad usos 0 Uses 9 Vasos 50 Unos 5 unes 52 Ununes 2 225 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 226 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 3 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switch The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 3 2 The DH
29. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 i 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x 1 1 1 1 1 1 2222 The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 e Port Type 152 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functio
30. 3 14 6 Port DSCP The section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports Others the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify Parameter configuration 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 6 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration Port Ingress Egress Translate Classify Rewrite a lt gt lt gt v 1 E Disable Disable y 2 0O Disable Disable 7 3 a Disable w Disable x 4 E Disable Disable 5 a Disable Disable x 6 O Disable w Disable 7 O Disable Disable z 8 a Disable w Disable y 9 O Disable Disable w 10 O Disable w Disable x 41 a Disable Disable 42 Disable w Disable w 43 a Disable Disable y 44 a Disable w Disable z 45 O Disable w Disable y 46 O Disable w Disable x 47 0
31. 5 OK 0 bad 275 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 5 2 Ping6 This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Length Ping Count Ping Interval 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 2 The I CMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Length Ping Count Ping Interval Parameter description IP Address The destination IP Address with IPv6 Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size what set on the switch After you press 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets 276 Publication date Dec 2012
32. A A AA A a aint iS ed 78 3 44 CIS TR OMS i cote cR wat AE E eth A E GaN E Boothe te te Dt ace 80 111 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 45 MS TL POMS A A A A AE 83 32456 BOG C StQts is A aa A A a iaaa aR 85 DA PROM StAtUs PEE A A A A A Ria 86 OA E PORESTATISUOS 20 A A A Lass te oarad ence aan ieee 88 3 5 IGMP SNOOPING iin lviii nuddi dd A dll de ca 89 3 5 1 Basic Configuration A A ib ee ave ilies 89 325 2 VEAN Configuration soii ii aa 92 325 3 Port Group Filtering ii A A eet ai tee 94 325 4 SIQIUS A nel vis iets eas be eddie 96 325 5 Group Information nese el Ri A ed Lh ee die 98 3 5 6 IPV4 SSM information iii id bi 99 3 6 MED SNOOPING issin nasheeds Sees nveeen de ead ad avii 101 3 6 1 Basic CONnMQUIALION iii iii pe dabei 101 3 6 2 VLAN Configuration coi ii pathol te 104 3 6 3 Port Group Filter iia ia e he deeds 106 3 0 4 SIGS A eee ved Led pL 107 3 6 5 Group Information iii Abc 109 3 6 6 IPV6 SSM Informali0N eier aneian aaien ane a aaaea Ar aaea aaa aaa a aaa aa an aa aaa aa TA E ea da aiaa 111 BPMN Reet a a a a e e dl ate tale ao ell et A bdo 112 8 41 Configuration tii aa taa Sales See dake ry Bate hee oe Oaa a AE Aa Aaa lb 112 3 7 2 MVR Port Group Allow COnfiQguratiOn 2 cccceccecsceceenceceneeeseaeeeeneecceeeecsnsesaeseeneecenetetsasetes 114 3 74 Statisti S ci A A et ane ai it ret ek 116 OD do do el e il e o a tactics de ke 117 8 8 1 LLDP CONQUE e AAA bbdd 117 9 8 2 LLDP NeighbOUTS ii A A tt 120 9 8 3LEDP
33. Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 267 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 3 Save Restore This section describes how to save and restore the Switch configuration including reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users Restore Users for any maintenance needs 5 3 1 Factory Defaults This section describes how to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web Interface To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 1 The Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Parameter description e Buttons Yes Click to Yes button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration 268 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 3 2 Save Start This section describes how to save the Switch Start configuration Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface T
34. Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GVRP statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GVRP Port Statistics Parameter description eo Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics e join Tx Count explain Join tx Count here e Leave Tx Count explain Leave Tx Count here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Port Ststistics information by manual 170 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 QoS The switch supports four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellen
35. Disable Disable 7 48 a Disable w Disable x 49 o Disable ww Disable z 50 a Disable Disable y 51 a Disable w Disable x 52 a Disable Disable y 184 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is O e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP e All Classify all DSCP eo Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 185 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 7 DSCP Based QoS The section will teach user to configure the DSCP B
36. Discovery Protocol D DEI DEl is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not 279 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new compu
37. MAC Learning which cannot be categorized to some function type MAC table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 3 10 1 Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here Web Interface To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Apply MAC Table Learning 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Apply Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click configuration and Add new Static entry 2 Specify the VLAN IP and Mac
38. MED CONTIQUES O ivi it A A eet ae 122 9 84 LEE DP MED NGIGNDOUIS oct A A eee tt 128 3 8 F POM Statisti S DA E A A A A ee 131 O O O 134 O GT GONNQUIATION irte A iaa 134 IDAS AUS iii dt bacan 136 32953 POWEF Delay it A e a 138 9 9 4 AUTO GHECKING oia boa 139 329 5 SCNOQUIN lc Plt aiid AA tien ibe 141 3 10 FILTERING DATA BASE citada 142 9101 GONTQUIATION ri td AET 142 3 10 2 Dynamic MAG Table iia 144 AENA o aliados los resisto 146 311 1 VLAN Membership citada iv 146 A sz cited P cab oteet tie O E beaiteatite th tovelas kein hier ie 148 BETTS SWIHCASIQUG si A oa as 150 SATVTAPO SAUS sis io ais 152 SAM Private VLANS ssir iaa A A A ae Seat ieee a AA aS heeds 154 3 11 5 1 Port ISOLAUOM iria A 154 9 11 6 MAC based VLAN iii iii is DA ese eee Tees as 155 3 1M 61 Configurato sacarina st 155 A o oO TOO 157 3 11 7 Protocol based VLAN ius iia 158 3 11 7 1 ProtocoOl to Group isn sisisi Did tados dc did a Didi da 158 S211 72 Group to VEAN idas do a a idi aa ay A a da 160 SAZ VOICE VLAN cita aci a a iaiia iaa A Aida 162 ALT COMPIQUIATION cti ii A AA A AA ADA teil A a ti dee 162 O A E Seva dce PP Me Evens Peele iiia T a aiT 164 13 DAR Post hea Ailes Magee dead lea Ai adie agen a La aden E eae ees 165 3 13 1 Config ration ici ii A a evade She DAA e ei i i ita 165 3713 2 SIQUSIICS ii A A HA A elie AAA at 167 SAI GVRP sitiada a db as Wieden dc a A aan 0 ii dey ee 168 3 13 1 Configuration cc i eiii e AAA eel A tit 168 3413 2 SIQUSUICS ci a A
39. Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted 177 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps
40. Revision Al 2 2 2 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean Time GMT If use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in a short after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP does not update the time periodically without user s processing Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM NTP 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 2 2 2 The NTP configuration NTP Configuration Server1 192 168 1 253 Server2 c0a8 010a Server3 c0a8 010a Server4 c0a8 010a Server 5 Parameter description e Server lto 5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthan
41. Revision Al 5 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Start Figure 5 5 3 The VeriPHY Port Cable Status Port PairA LengthA PairB LengthB PairC LengthC PairD LengthD Parameter description eo Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair 277 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al ACE ACL AES APS A Glossary of Web based Management ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed
42. Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 60 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured
43. TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 128 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al applicable to Generic Endpoints Class and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class m LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpo
44. The default value is kbps Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 178 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 4 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shaping for all switch ports Others the user could get all detail information ot the ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 14 4 The QoS Egress Port Shapers Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port 1 y Scheduler Mode Strict Priority 7 Queue Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess P50 kbps x plfsoo kbps F500 kbps 500 kbps x piso kbps 500 kbps x D F500 kbps piso kbps Apply Reset Cancel 179 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Strict Priority e If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers e Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Shapers Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Sc
45. VLAN Port Configuration parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 2 The VLAN Port Configuration Port Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Egress Rule PVID a lt gt E lt gt r lt gt 4 Unaware x El All 7 Hybrid 7 1 2 Unaware w O All Eel Horia w 1 3 Unaware x O All iv Hybrid iy 1 4 Unaware x T All Hybrid iy 4 5 Unaware w O All gt Hybrid x 1 6 unaware a All 5 Hyori e 1 7 Unaware w O Ar sw Hybrid e 1 8 Unaware y O All x Hybrid oe 1 9 Unaware x E All iy Hybrid 7 1 10 Unaware x O All 7 Hybrid iy 1 40 Unaware x O All e Hybrid e 1 41 Unaware a All iy Hybrid iw 1 42 Unaware w O All e Hybrid iv 1 43 Unaware w T All Ly Hyori 7 1 44 Unaware x E All Hybrid iy 1 45 Unaware w O All gt Hybrid iv 1 46 Unaware w O All e Hybrid x 1 47 Unaware x O Al y Hybrid w 1 48 Unaware x El All iy Hybrid iy 1 49 Unaware i E All z Hybrid iy 1 50 Unaware x O All 7 Hybrid iy 1 51 Unaware x O All e Hybrid ina 4 Unaware x O Hybrid 7 1 Parameter description e Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all the Cust
46. VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed eo Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny 111 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 7 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports 3 7 1 Configuration The section describes user could set the MVR basic Configuration and some parameters in the switch Web Interface To configure the MVR Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Configuration 2 Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters 3 Click the apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the se
47. Za 4 Down Auto y x X 10056 Discard 7 Disabled y 42 148 Down Auto Z x x 10056 Discard Disabled 43 Down Auto y x x 10056 Discard w Disabled 5 44 O Down Auto y x x rj 10056 Discard Disabled X 45 o Down Auto z x x m 10056 Discard v Disabled z 46 Down Auto x AS O 10056 Discard Disabled 2 47 Oo Down Auto z x x E 10056 Discard v Disabled x 48 O Down Auto x x x E 10056 Discard Disabled z 49 Down 10Gbps FDX y x x j 10056 50 Down 10Gbps FDX w se xe 10056 51 Down 10Gbps FDX x x x 10056 52 Down 10Gbps FDX 7 x 52 E 10056 J Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row eo Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation 38 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Oo Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on
48. a reachability tree that is a subset of an active topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration and de registration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GARP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GARP configures 2 Specify GARP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 13 1 The GARP Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration Auto refresh _ Port LS thee TESE Sr Leave All Application ga GARP Applicant Timer Timer 1 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN aw normal participant 2 200 600 10000 GVRP vlan normat participa
49. a router port eo Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port 90 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 91 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 2 VLAN Configuration The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping function For Each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable Snooping IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the blank field 3 Click the refresh to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display previous entry or next entry 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to canc
50. address Port Members 3 Click Apply Figure 3 9 1 The MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Aging Time 300 seconds NID MAC Address 3 4 516 7 8 9 10 49 12 43 14 15 16 17 19 19 20 29 22 23 fijoo 00 00 00 000 DODO OODOOOOCOODOUOOOOUOOCI Parameter description e Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging 142 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking M Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done eo Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port
51. agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 230 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 4 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Relay Statistics information of the switch The statistics show both of Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP Relay Statistics Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad to Server Error from Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop to Client Error from Client Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Transmit to Server The nu
52. allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the
53. also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port the policy number is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with 3 2 1 Ports The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of the each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting 3 Click the apply to save the setting 4 lf you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port then you could click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information Figure 3 2 1 The ACL Ports Configuration Port PolicyID Action RateLimiterID PortRedirect Logging Shutdown State Counter
54. are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected switch unit when you click on Apply The VLAN is thereafter present on the other switch units but with no port members The check box is greyed out when VLAN is displayed on other switches but user can add member ports to it A VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you click Apply The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual Or press clear to clean up the VLAN table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table 147 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 2 Ports The function in VLAN Tag Rule Setting user can input VID number to each port The range of VID number is from 1 to 4094 User also can choose ingress filtering rules to each port There are two ingress filtering rules which can be applied to the switch The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is forward only packets with VID matching this port s configured VID The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is drop untagged frame You can also select the Role of each port as Access Trunk or Hybrid Web Interface To configure VLAN Port configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Configuration 2 Specify the
55. assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag O is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading O s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EA
56. can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific 58 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al DIP mask in dotted decimal notation ICMP Parameters e ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value ICMP Code Filter Specify
57. click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 1 The sFlow Collector Configuration sFlow Receiver Configuration Configured Current Receiver Id 1 1 IP Type IPV4 IPv4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port 6343 6343 Time Out 0 0 Datagram Size 1400 1400 Parameter description e Receiver lid The Receiver ID input fields allow the user to select the receiver ID Indicates the ID of this particular sFlow Receiver Currently one ID is supported as one collector is supported eo IP Type A drop down list to select the type of IP of Collector is displayed By default IPv4 is the type of Collector IP type You could using IPv4 or IPv6 e IP Address The address of a reachable IP is to be entered into the text box This IP is used to monitor the sFlow samples sent by sFlow Agent our switch By default The IP is set to 0 0 0 0 and a new entry has to be added to it Port A port to listen to the sFlow Agent has to be configured for the Collector 201 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box The value accepted is within the range of 1 65535 But an appropriate port number not used by other protocols need to be configured By default the port s number is 6343 e Time out It is the duration during which the collector receives samples Once it is expired the sampler stops sending the samples It is through the management the v
58. cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated Root T X hi Designated Root ji N Designated Port Port X Y Bridge OOOO Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology 3 4 1 Bridge Settings The section describes that how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the Swtich Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scoll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Advanced settings 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need
59. different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports unde
60. disable GVRP globally select Disable Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings There are three configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases GVRP Mode GVRP rrole 1 GVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable GVRP Mode on perticular port locally e Disable Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port e Enable Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 GVRP rrole This configuration is used to configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable GVRP rrole on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP rrole on this port The default configuration is disable Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Global configuration information by manual Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 169 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 13 2 Statistics The section describes to shows the basic GVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GVRP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GVRP statistics 2 Scroll which port you want to display the GVRP
61. gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The GMPv3 I Pv4 SSM Information IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh _ Refresh lt lt Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLANID Group Port Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMP SFM Information Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SFM Information Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over 99 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al IGMP SFM Information Table Columns eo VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed 0 Por
62. just input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each item Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click Time Manual 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 2 2 1 The time configuration Use Local Settings Clock Source O Usente Local Time 2011 01 01 08 11 21 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Time Zone Offset 480 min Daylight Savings L Enable Time Set Offset 60 min Range 1 1440 Default 60 x 9 Daylight Savings Type a From YYYY MM DD HH MM To YYYY MM DD HH MM F Day Sun v Week First Month Jan y Time rom 00 00 HH MM Day Sun v Week First Month Jan Time To 00 00 HH MM Time amp Date 2011 01 01 08 11 21 Parameter description o Clock Source To click what clock source for the GEPOEL2 ESW52X You can select Use local Settings or Use NTP Server for GEPOEL2 ESW52X time clock source e Local Time Show the current time of the system e Time Zone Offset Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes 12 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Daylight Saving Daylight saving is adopted in some countries If set it will adjust the time lag or in advance in unit of hours according to the starti
63. make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved 160 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al values e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 161 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 12 Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 3 12 1 Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be co
64. map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Isolation 2 Evoke which port want to enable Port Isolation 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 5 1 The Port Isolation Configuration Port Isolation Configuration Port Number l1f2J3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Apply Parameter description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 154 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 6 MAC based VLAN MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame A most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds
65. matches this TCP UDP source value TCP UDP Destination Filter Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears 59 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP SYN Specify the TCP
66. model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not require group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM by IANA In the switch you can configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast addresses also Web Interface To display the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt
67. need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status 4 Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 3 5 4 The I GMP Snooping Status 96 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries e Queries Received The number of Received Queries e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Status or clear them by manual 97 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 5 Group Information After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
68. of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by
69. particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is recei
70. points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED 1 Click LLDP MED Configuration 2 Modify Fast start repeat count parameter default is 4 3 Modify Coordinates Location psrameters 4 Fill Civic Address Location parameters 5 Add new policy 6 Click Apply will show following Policy Port Configuration 7 Select Policy ID for each port 8 Click Apply Figure 3 8 3 The LLDP MED Configuration Fast start repeat count 4 122 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP Delete 0 Voice Tagged 1 0 0 Delete 1 Voice Tagged 1 0 0 Add new policy Poli y Port Configuration Policy ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Apply Reset Parameter description Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VolP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to
71. save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 9 The DSCP Classification Configuration DSCP Classification QoS Class DSCP lt gt z 0 0 BE NA 1 0 BE y 2 0 BE v 3 0 BE y 4 0 BE Z 5 0 BE y 6 0 BE v T 0 BE x Parameter description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes eo DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 190 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 10 QoS Control List Configuration The section shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QoS Contol List 2 Click the Do add a new QoS Control List 3 Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5
72. shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings There are 2 types configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases Timer Values Application Attribute Type GARP Applicant e Timer Values To set the GARP join timer leave timer and leave all timers units is Micro second Three different timers can be configured on this page e Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200ms e Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600ms e Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000ms e Application Currently only supported application is GVRP e Attribute Type Currently only supported Attribute Type is VLAN e GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for GARP on a particular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant e Buttons Apply Click to applychanges Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 166 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 13 2 Statistics The section describes to port statistics of GARP for all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently sel
73. softphone applications on typical data centric devices such 126 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as
74. specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 130 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 8 5 Port Statistics The section provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click LLDP then click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters 2 Click Refresh for manual update web scre
75. supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a 236 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated o Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole p
76. the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value eo Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented e Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon 132 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al reboot Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 133 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 9 PoE PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply 3 9 1 Configuration This page
77. the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag eo Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear eo Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation eo Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear e Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific ta
78. the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Relay Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 232 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 5 NAS The section describes to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet 4 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure NAS setting of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Netwrok Access Server in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Netwrok Access Server Configuration 2 Checked Reauthentication Enabled 3 Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds 4 Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds 5 Set Aging Peroid Default is 300 seconds 6 Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds 7 Checked RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled 8 Checked RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled 9 Checked Guest VLAN Enabled 10 Specify Guest VLAN ID 11 Specify Max Reauth Count 12 Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 13 Click Apply Figure 4 5 1 The Network Access Server Configuration Mode Di
79. the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the mean time the MAC based VLAN technology is developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices 3 11 6 1 Configuration The MAC based VLAN entries can be configured here This page a
80. this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 218 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 1 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 4 1 2 The Static I P Source Guard Table Delete Port VLAN ID Resft_ IP Address Delete Port VLANID IP Address 1 ll Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings eo VLANID The vlan id for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address MAC address Allowed S
81. to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below o Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longe
82. using AAA servers 4 6 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure AAA setting of TACACS or RADIUS server Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Set Timeout Default is 15 seconds 2 Set Dead Time Default is 300 seconds To configure a TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Authorization 2 Select Enabled in the Failback to Local Authorization 3 Select Enabled in the Account To configure a RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for Radius Server Default is 1812 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface Check Enabled Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server Specify Accounting Port for Radius Server Default is 1813 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a TACACS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface Check Enabled Specify IP address or Hostname for TACACS Server Specify Authentication Port for TACACS Server Default is 49 Specify the Secret with TACACS Server Ron Figure 4 5 3 1 The Common Server Configuration Figure 4 5 3 2 The TACACS Accounting Configuration
83. when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range isOx600 to OxFFFF but excluding Ox800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 61 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 2 4 ACL Status The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then ACL status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Figure 3 2 4 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Combined y a Rate Limiter Port Redirect CPU CPU Once Counter Conflict i Disabled Yes No Disabled Yes No Disabled No No Disabled No No Combined Z 7 Refresh Combined ect Static ve
84. workforce GEPOEL2 ESW52X Web Managed Switches provide 52 ports in a single device the specification is highlighted as follows e 12 features provide better manageability security QoS and performance e High port count design with all Gigabit Ethernet ports e Support guest VLAN voice VLAN Port based tag based and Protocol based VLANs Support 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet standard Support 8K MAC table Support Pv6 IPv4 Dual stack Support s Flow Support 802 3at and compliant with 802 3af Support Easy Configuration Port for easy implement the IP Phone IP Camera or Wireless environment Overview of this user s manual e Chapter 1 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 2 Maintenance 1 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al Initial Configuration Operation of Web based Management This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the GEPOEL2 ESW52X through the web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status even illegal access record and so on The default values of the GEPOEL2 ESW52X are listed in the table below IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Username admin Password Afte
85. 1 e a 282 E e e OS 283 Mi renter ereerrer enter ererrrer er reer rere rere a en np ey eee aan ann 283 No e ti N AE 284 Ds O 285 Pa o a aaa ra 285 DA a e An da 286 PA a a a a e O 287 a 287 A o a e O 288 A oa 289 NM e R rerrrereeceeh 289 vi Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Revision History Release Date Revision V1 57 07 12 2012 A1 vii Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al INTRODUCTION Overview In this user s manual it will not only tell you how to install and connect your network system but configure and monitor the GEPOEL2 ESW52X by RS 232 serial interface or through the web and Ethernet ports step by step Many explanations in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the examples of the operation for web based interface The GEPOEL2 ESW52X series the next generation Web managed switches from Manufacture is a portfolio of affordable managed switches that provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network These switches deliver more intelligent features you need to improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level networking includes small business or enterprise application and helps you create a more efficient better connected
86. 1 None 0 128 0 7 1 None 0 128 0 e 8 1 None 0 128 0 e 9 1 None 0 128 0 e 10 4 None 0 128 0 e 11 1 None 0 128 0 e 12 1 None 0 128 0 e 13 1 None 0 128 0 14 1 None 0 128 0 e 15 1 None 0 128 0 e 16 1 None 0 128 e 17 1 None 0 128 e 18 1 None 0 128 0 19 1 None 0 128 0 20 1 None 0 128 0 sFlow Port 1 sFlow Instance 1 Sampler Type None y Sampling Rate 0 Max Hdr Size Polling Interval 0 Parameter description sFlow Ports List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured sFlow Instance 203 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Configured sFlow instance for the port number Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None Rx Tx or All You can scroll to choice one for your sampler type By default The value is None Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling Buttons Edits the Data source sampler configuration Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel to clear up what your setting Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the sFlow Sampler information by
87. 1e Pingtel phones A 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0 bb 3Com phones Add new entry Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Telephony OUI A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 e Add New entry Click to add a new entry in Voice VLAN OUI table An empty row is added to the table the Telephony OUI Description e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NoTE All non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds For example When Pkts keep to enter the port to add a new OUI entry It can help this OUI match current Pkts then it must be found the packet will be forwared 164 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 13 GARP The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN and these devices form
88. 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 Oar wh gt NOTE All frame types are explained below i 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 0xF FFF or Any default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 5 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be sp
89. 3 33 FF 73 01 29 Destination MAC for Pv6 Neighbor Solicitation reference IPv6 DAD J PG 33 33 FF A8 01 01 your switch MAC address for I Pv6 144 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al global IP FF FF FF FF FF FF for Broadcast 145 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 VLAN To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP and Telnet session By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one management VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route 3 11 1 VLAN Membership The VLAN membership configuration for the selected switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID 0 4094 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 1
90. A A A E a E E dee 170 ITA Oi a ected ead lea EA a A een a deo aden A E T dea da 171 3 14 1 POrt Classification ici ci A A A AE tdt 171 IAALPOSEPONCIDOOD coccion AAA A A A A A ois 174 3 14 3 Port SCONOQU O titi a aoe aie Gti 176 iv Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 144 POSES NADINE A ia as A dian ash OOS Seanad A AA oh AA aain 179 Jt POr Tag REMAKING orogen ir ar ETO eaczansgvss AI 182 aea N oA ad a A BAT D ne E E A A E TAE A EI E SOS 184 3214 7 DSCPEBIASCA A QOS iii E ET A TA E ads 186 3 14 8 DSCP TranSlatiOn e a a a aa a a a a aE Ea a E ENEE 188 3 14 9 DSCP Classification ccccccccececeeececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseseceseseseceseteseseeeseeeseceteceeeseteeeeeceeeeeeeeese 190 3 14 10 QOS Control List Configuration oooonococinccnnonicinnccnnccccconccnnnnnnn cnc no rn nora cnn 191 IAN OICE STATUS A AA ASA 195 3144 12 Storm CON MO ii is A 197 SHAM OW AED 5 A A rias 199 97 110 S FLOW AGENTS A A AA A te 201 IATA CONOCIO A A ados 201 TAL SAM iii di a aii ai ei aid ici 203 3 18 LOOP PROTECTION dit Asa 205 3 18 1 CONQUE eva ean aa a aa aa aa a aaa a aiaeei Ta aaa iaaa a aaa Saai 205 E fhe oat 118 EE A A E E EA A A E A 207 IA KE EASY PORT AA A A E A AE A AE AARE 208 B 20 MIRRORING 04 tati A E A A AAA A RE 210 3 21 TRAP EVENT SEVERITY a A A A E 212 3 22 SMTP CONFIGURATION iiaee ipee ie aa aa iarrta a raaa a aaner pa aaaea eia Paan aaa aa ia aa aaa aa EAE 214 e UPN A A a a 215 CHAPTER 4 SECURITY AA dadaa aaraa aan aaaea
91. CP Snooping Port Statistics AG ce Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Rx NAK Tx NAK Rx Release Tx Release Rx Inform Tx Inform Rx Lease Query Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Tx Lease Active 0000000000o00o0 gt Oo000000000o0o0o2 Parameter description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitt
92. Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 181 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 5 Port Tag Remarking The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others the ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 14 5 The Port Tag Remarking Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking Classified Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e Tag Remarking Mode To scroll to select the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values 182 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level eo Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes 183 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al
93. Counter Conflict Disabled Reserved 91 No bled IP Management 0 No ed IP Source Guard 0 No bled PMC 0 No ARP Inspection ARP Inspection Loop Protection Single IP Conflict Parameter description eo User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port eo Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by Pand ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames I Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames I Pv4 I CMP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with ICMP protocol I Pv4 UDP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with UDP protocol I Pv4 TCP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with TCP protocol 62 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al I Pv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not CMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all Pv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Port Redirect Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter op
94. Dual image for firmware redundancy purpose You can select what firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Web Interface To configure a Firmware Selection in the web interface 1 Chick Activate Alternate Image 2 Click yes to complete firmware selection Figure 5 2 2 The Firmware Selection Active Image Image managed Version GEPoEL2 ESW52X standalone v1 57 Date 2012 12 06T 19 08 22 08 00 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version LGB5052A standalone v1 58 Date 2012 12 12T16 14 51 08 00 Activate Alternate Image Message from we bpage YD 4re you sure you want to activate the alternate software image Parameter description e Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state e Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page eo Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image eo Date The date where the firmware was produced 266 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al NOTE 1 Incase the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate
95. E Click the apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the Items displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and set the actions to take when a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown oR Ww Figure 3 2 3 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Action RateLimiter PortRedirect Count Action Rate Limiter Disabled y Port Redirect Disabled w Logging Disabied 7 Shutdown Disabled y DMAC Filter Any 7 53 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies All The ACE applies to all port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where nis the number of the switch port Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to255
96. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 4 The STP CI ST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration STP Restricted Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge Role TCN BPDU Guard point TN auto Jl 128 5 Non Edoe I ua O Forced True w CIST Normal Port Configuration sa A lt gt 7 lt gt ima lt gt 7 E T E El lt gt y 110 auto E 128 x Non Edge e Y m a a Auto 5 O Auto kz 128 iz Non Edge E v aja O Auto y IE auto x 128 Non Eage e MI a a O Auto 4 a Auto iv 128 7 Non Edge iv Ed aja T Auto y 5 0 auto x 128 Non Edge I a a O Auto 6 a Auto z 128 Non Edge E Y aja a Auto y TO auto x 128 w Non Edge E a a O Auto wr 30 Auto iv 128 Non Edge Y aja a Auto SO auto x 128 Non Edge I a O Auto 140 11 auto fix 128 Non Edge E CEEL o Auto y a ON auto e 128 7 Non Eage w E aja O Auto iw a TT Auto iz 128 y Non Edge Y ua O Auto x 43 ao fe 128 Non Edge aa O Auto w 48 10D auto w 128 Non Edge I a a O Auto y 45 ao e 128
97. Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Apply Figure 4 1 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Disana Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients lt gt lt gt Disabled w Unlimited Disabled 7 Unlimited Disabled w Unlimited Disabled w Unlimited Disabled w Unlimited a e U N EEE EE 217 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 45 Disabled Unlimited Z 46 Disabled Unlimited 47 Disabled v Unlimited EA 48 Disabled 7 Unlimited KA 49 Disabled Unlimited z 50 Disabled Unlimited v 51 Disabled Unlimited v 52 Disabled Unlimited Ka Parameter description e Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on
98. LANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface 1 2 3 4 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped blank field Click the apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 2 The MSTI Configuration Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 40 c7 75 0a b4 MSTI Mapping Parameter description Configuration Identification Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters 76 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI confi
99. O000000000O0oO0O lolo 00000000 00000000000 locos 00000000 00000000000 gt 00000 00000000 0000000000O oooocoof 00000000 oOo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0o0O0 ooooof 00000000 00000000000O0O oooooX 00000000 00000000000 RSRSRS o 00000000 00000000000O oooocooN 00000000 00000000000 5 fess es es feat fea Se 00000000 oco00 00 000000 Soocoocoo ooooo c o 00000000 ooo0oc0oc0c0co eco ec co 0o fo ooooococ co 00000000000 00000000 000000 o0Oo0Oo0o0oOoO R Ee Wes 8 15 NN Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Queuing Counters or clear them by manual 46 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 1 6 SFP Information The section describes that switch could display the SFP module detail information which you connect it to the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type wavelength banud rate and Vendor OUI etc Web Interface To Display the SFP information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then SFP Information 2 To display the SFP Information Figure 3 1 6 The SFP Information Overview Retesh Connector Type Fiber Type Si Tx Centr
100. P Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 18 Proxy Enabled 89 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Port Related Configuration Port Router Port FastLeave Throttling 1 unlimited 2 unlimited v 3 unlimited Z unlimited 5 unlimited 6 unlimited T unlimited v 8 unlimited 9 unlimited v 10 unlimited v 41 unlimited w 42 unlimited 43 unlimited ae 45 1 46 2 3 47 4 48 5 6 49 7 50 8 9 51 110 52 unlimited Parameter description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered PMCv4 traffic flooding IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side o Port It shows the physical Port index of switch e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as
101. POL based modes i e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X 238 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Gues
102. Parameter description Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based on hardware aging time The actual aging time will be situated between the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t equal disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode
103. The VLAN Membership Configuration 1 with 20 Port Member Delete VLAN ID VLAN Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2 26 EE 30 31 32 33 9 50 51 52 11 default o Ada New VLAN f Apply Reset A o with 20 Delete VLANID VLAN Name 11213415167 lode lle ends oda ee er O 1 default MMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMIMJMIMMIMMIMMIMMJIMMJMIMMIMMIMiIMMIMii Add New VLAN Parameter description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the selected switch If none of the ports of this switch are members of a VLAN then the delete checkbox will be greyed out you cannot delete that entry during the next Save e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN eo VLAN Name Indicates the name of VLAN VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain at least one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Oo Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked 146 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID
104. User s Manual 44 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo PoE L2 Plus Managed Switch Release 1 57 2012 Manufacture Corporation All rights reserved All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies ooo eo About This Manual Copyright Copyright 2012 Manufacture Corporation All rights reserved The products and programs described in this guide are licensed products of Manufacture Corporation This manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No parts of this manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical It includes photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of Manufacture Corporation Purpose This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the switch Audience The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Conventions The following conventions are used throu
105. abled Parameter description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation 262 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 11 Auth Method This page shows how to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure a Authentication Method Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Client console telent ssh web which you want to monitor 2 Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs 3 Checked Fallback 4 Click Apply Figure 4 11 1 The HTTPS Configuration Client Authentication Method Fallback console local e telnet local z ssh local _E web local E Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values none authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs
106. abled Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State 235 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it
107. ace 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Status 2 Evoke the Auto refresh or click to refresh the Loop protection Port status by Manual Figure 3 18 2 The Loop Protection Status LI Refresh EFEN EEEE E ASREUBRRENN Sonne E co 235 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 y 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 33333333 Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode Loops The number of loops detected on this port eo Status The current loop protection status of the port Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Loop Protection information by manual 207 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 19 Easy Port Easy Port provide a convenient way to save and share common configurations You can use it to enable features and settings based on the location of a switch in the network and for mass configuration deployments across the network You could easy to implement included Voice IP phone Wireless Access Point and IP Camera etc Others you can leverage configuration to run a converged voice video and data network consideri
108. ackets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits e Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets e Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Lon
109. age e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 23 UPnP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components Web Interface To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration UPnP 2 Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 23 1 The UPnP Configuration UPnP Configuration Mode Disabled v TTL 4 Advertising Duration 100 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the UPnP Configuration page e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled Oo TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration
110. aiaa ba aaa daaa aa ea aaa Ea Paaa daea baaaie 217 4 1 IP SOURCE GUARD ccccccccccccecssssesececeecsessuaeseseeeeesesesuaseeesesesceeseaaeseceescesseseaaeceeeeseecsesaaaeseeeeseeeees 217 BANCO QUIN EEEE E E E O EEE 217 AIROSO AIC AEE A A EE A EE E E A i i EN 219 4153 DYNAMIC TADE ee iia oiee area E EA ETEA E E NE ERE is 220 4 2 ARP INSPECTION iia nae aa aaa i a a a a a a a a a a e aa a 1 EN 221 4 2 A E0101 131E U10 a E A E E E ET 221 4 22 Slate lable NO 223 4 2 3 Dynamic Table siiin tiinas nme inanes ida ene 224 4 3 DHGP SNOOPING it AAA eel 225 43 1 CONQUE ii a i iaaa aei 225 AFP SASOS E A Ct Mat a cbt a a a aR 227 4 4 DHC P RELAY ia A A 229 4 451 CONMNQUIALION eis ciate teanna amaia A aaa iaaa aaa 229 AA NUS UE tl iodo 231 ADO NAS A A A AAA A AAA AA AAA cata bane icia des 233 4 51 CONNQUIAUON ici iii iii 233 A252 SMC SAUS AAA AAA AAA 240 A 9 3 POE SOU AA A AR A 242 A O AAA A A A A O deel A SA A A A A E 245 AA Configuration A AA ite ci aie A tt el 245 4 6 2 Radis DVM ii a aiii aiii 249 4 6 3 Radius DOS tt A A A aed Tee ee 251 4 7 PORT SECURE ee iad de 252 ASA LATHE G ONO it ia cc Dalat cab Ada cus Laid Vand dated ends Diva led ibi 252 AS 2 WICH SEALS oy ocd cdi es iii soba A das ais bales vad E ia 255 AS POM SIAUUS A A A A ese eee hn ose Be 257 4 8 ACCESS MANAGEMENT cccccceceeseeaecesecececsuaesececececseseaaeseseesescceseaaeseeeeseecseseaaeseceeseesseseaaeseeeeseeenes 258 BA Configuration a A eases atte eee vessels A
111. ailure action Failure Log Failure loggings counter Failure Action The action when the third fail detection Nothing Keep Ping the remote PD but does nothing further Reboot Remote PD Cut off the power of the PoE port make PD rebooted Reboot time When PD has been rebooted the PoE port restored power after the specified time Button Apply Click Apply to apply the change 140 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 9 5 Scheduling This page allows the user to make a perfect schedule of PoE power supply PoE Scheduling not only makes PoE management easier but also saves more energy Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Scheduling in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PoE and Scheduling 2 Select the local port and enable 3 Select time and day to supply power 4 Click Apply to apply the change Figure 3 9 5 The POE Scheduling Hour a jas 20 3 cal 50 6 10 of s 10 mo no ES dll tdo Parameter description e Port Status This is the logical port number and it s PoE Scheduling mode z is enable X is disable e Week Day Sun Mon The days of PoE port provide power of a week e Hour The time of PoE port provide power of a day e Button Apply Click Apply to apply the change 141 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 10 Filtering Data Base Filtering Data Base Configuration gathers many functions including MAC Table Information Static
112. al Wavelength Baud Rate Vendor OUI Vendor Name SFP LC S10 7717010094 070717 Parameter description e Connector Type Display the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on e Fiber Type Display the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode Single Mode e Tx Central Wavelength Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850nm 1310nm 1550nm and so on e Baud Rate Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on e Vendor OUI Display the Manufacturer s OUI code which is assigned by IEEE e Vendor Name Display the company name of the module manufacturer e Vendor P N Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer e Vendor Rev Revision Display the module revision e Vendor SN Serial Number Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer 47 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Date Code Show the date this SFP module was made Temperature Show the current temperature of SFP module Vcc Show the working DC voltage of SFP module Mon1 Bias mA Show the Bias current of SFP module Mon2 TX PWR Show the transmit power of SFP module Mon3 RX PWR Show the receiver power of SFP module 48 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 2 ACL The GEL2 ESW52X switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but
113. allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings Web Interface To configure Power Over Ethernet in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PoE and Configuration 2 Setting system retry time interval 3 Enable the PD port and specify priority power consumption 3 Click Apply Figure 3 9 1 The PoE Configuration Enabled 7 Low Enabled J Low 46 Enabled Low 47 Enabled iy Low 48 Enabled Low 15 4 15 4 15 4 15 4 15 4 Port PoE Mode Priority Maximum Power W Reset Se He a 1 Enabled e Low 5 4090 2 Enabled x Low w 5 4000 3 Enabled Low ly 15 4 E 4 Enabied w Low w 5 4005 5 Enabled w Low e 154005 6 Enabled x Low 15417 7 Enabled w Low w 154005 8 Enabled w Low 5 4005 9 Enabled w Low 5 4000 10 Enabled EA Low i 5 15 4 E 37 Enabled Low 15 4 Z 38 Enabled w Low 5 4005 39 Enabled Low 54090 40 Enabled i Low 154 41 Enabled w Low 5 4005 42 Enabled Low 5 4005 43 Enabled Low 15 4005 44 T 45 O T o O OO CN ENE Apply Reset Parameter description 134 Publication date Dec
114. alue is set before it expires The value accepted is within the range of 0 2147483647 By default it is set to 0 e Datagram Size It is the maximum UDP datagram size to send out the sFlow samples to the receiver The value accepted is within the range of 200 1500 bytes The default is 1400 bytes o Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 202 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 15 2 Sampler The section display the sFlow sampler what you set or you can edit it for your requirement That will help user based on a defined sampling rate an average of 1 out of N packets operations is randomly sampled This type of sampling does not provide a 100 accurate result but it does provide a result with quantifiable accuracy Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent sampler 2 click the to edit the sFlow sampler parameters 3 Scroll to Sample Type to choice with None Tx Rx or All 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 2 The sFlow sampler Configuration Flow Sampling Counter Sampling setae Dents A ama Tyne Sanitas Real Macias St Palla val 1 1 None 0 128 0 2 1 None 0 128 0 3 1 None 0 128 0 e 4 1 None 0 128 0 5 1 None 0 128 0 e 6
115. ard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP SHA SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length Shaper Ashaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNAP The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier 287 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al SNMP SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management archit
116. ased QoS mode that This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS 2 Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust 3 Scroll to select QoS Class and DPL parameters 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 7 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration QoS Class DPL 9 10 AF11 11 12 AF12 13 14 AF13 15 16 CS2 17 18 AF21 19 DOBBe roo DDD DODDoDoODOooDoDOoOs SEES aaa alelslsls 8 8 515 8 5 5 sl5 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 e 86 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al jaja oyajo a Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 187 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 8 DSCP Translation The section describes the swtich allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can
117. be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 Parameters 3 Evoke to enable or disable Classify 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 8 The DSCP Translation Configuration Ingress Egress ate a Classify essai lt gt fx a lt gt IE 0 BE joe h o eE wi 1 1 z a 1 y 2 2 z O 2 ina 3 30 O 3 le 4 4 lx O 4 lx 5 5 x O 5 y 6 6 CA 7 7 ina O 7 xi scsi ecs le act y 9 9 fx DO 9 m 10 AF11 10 AF11 E 10 AF11 11 11 E z 12 AF12 12 AF12 a 12 AF 12 w 13 13 w O 13 fa 14 AF13 14 ar O 14 AF13 7 15 15 O 15 x 16 CS2 16 CS2 w O 16 CS2 x 17 17 f a 7 ois 18 AF21 18 AF21 w a 18 AF21 19 a e o 9 y 20 AF22 20 AF22 C 20 AF22 x 188 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 55 55 M 55 y 56 CS7 56 CS7 v 56 CS7 57 57 M 57 M 58 58 v 58 M 59 59 M 59 M 60 60 M 60 61 61 M 61 v 62 62 y 62 63 63 M 63 M Parameter description DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP va
118. button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 65 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 3 2 LACP Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification as their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk group also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk 3 3 2 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member ports is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member ports is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the web interface Click Configuration LACP Configuration Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific Default is Auto 1 2 A Figure 3 3 2 1 The LACP Port Configuration LACP Port Configurati
119. changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 103 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 2 VLAN Configuration When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration VLAN Snooping MLD QI QRI 0 1 LLQI O 1 URI 1D Enabled cT A ee a E sec sec 1 E v Apply Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected Oo MLD Querier A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Quer
120. ck to Apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 175 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 3 Port Scheduler This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 14 3 The QoS Egress Port Schedules Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers El a o ica a ae Gala Re e Rete lentes a E N EA EEEE 2 oye UE Ec tse RY Wa Ye EAE JE E a a lalala ls e A ite Venlo l ae a leet eng lal a Fi VERS SAN o S fa A As EY NPE Scheduler Mode Strict Priority Queue Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess 4500 kbps v F500 kbps v F500 kbps v F500 kbps plfsoo kbps v plfsoo kbps x F500 kbps P50 kbps v Apply 176 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e Weight
121. connectors that conform to FCC standards CONNECTING TO PCS SERVERS HUBS AND SWITCHES Stepl Attach one end of a twisted pair cable segment to the device s RJ 45 connector Figure 16 Making Twisted Pair Connections 5 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Step2 If the device is a network card and the switch is in the wiring closet attach the other end of the cable segment to a modular wall outlet that is connected to the wiring closet See the section Network Wiring Connections Otherwise attach the other end to an available port on the switch Make sure each twisted pair cable does not exceed 100 meters 328 ft in length unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may pograde overall performance for the segment attached to the hu Step3 As each connection is made the Link LED on the switch corresponding to each port will light green 1000 Mbps or amber 100 Mbps to indicate that the connection is valid O OTE Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hu NETWORK WIRING CONNECTIONS Today the punch down block is an integral part of many of the newer equipment racks It is actually part of the patch panel Instructions for making connections in the wiring closet with this type of equipment follows Stepl Attach one end of a patch cable to an available port on the switch and the other end to the patch panel
122. d y a Y Y 3 Disabled y B Y Y 4 Disabled y E Y Y 5 Disabled B Y 6 Disabled y a Y Y 7 Disabled o x Y 8 Disabled B Y Y 9 Disabled a Y 10 Disabled w Y Y 117 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 43 Disabled y Y Y Y Y Y 44 Disabled y 7 y 7 Y 45 Disabled y Y Y Y Y Y 46 Disabled y y Y Y y Y 47 Disabled y Y Y y y 48 Disabled Y Y Y Y Y 49 Disabled y y 7 Y Y y 50 Disabled y Y Y Y Y Y 51 Disabled Y Y Y Y Y 52 Disabled Y Y Y Y Y Parameter description LLDP Parameters Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192
123. d greater than zero must not be able 57 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care P Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you
124. d on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 290 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al
125. d way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 14 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al 2 3 Account In this function only administrator can create modify or delete the username and password Administrator can modify other guest identities password without confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator equivalent identity Guest equivalent identity can modify his password only Please note that you must confirm administrator guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance before configuring the username and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and unable to be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created 2 3 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Account in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Users 2 Click Add new user 3 Specify the User Name parameter 4 Click Apply Figure2 3 1 The Users Account configuration UserName Privilege Level admin 15 Add new user User Sett
126. ded y O Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 eo View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or 31 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al asterisk e Apply To click the apply icon apply the configuration change to ROM 32 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 7 Access The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please check lt Add new access gt button and enter the access information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display t
127. defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLANID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 Oo DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 e Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Apply e Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or po
128. disabled enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror mode 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 20 1 The Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Disabled y Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 653565 a m O Parameter description Port to mirror on 210 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Gi Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is theref
129. dminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushin
130. don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned 237 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class
131. draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit R
132. dy to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Status by manual 250 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 6 3 Radius Details This section shows you an detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 6 3 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Statistics information by manual Others you can click the clear to clean up all entries 251 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 7 Port Security This section shows yo
133. e To configure an Import Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select the config file in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 4 2 The Import Config E mace_028 jpg E maGe_040 jpg 2 GE 8 Ports PoE E eraki Fan issue ti Heco series productRert Mirror datail SPEC xlsx eraki NAND Flash Desktop WH EM EPL1000_v1 doc eraki NAND flash ys EM EPL1000_ v1 pdf eraki Project MP Fes 2528 PCBA Debug issue tracWiqg table_20110902 xIsx Meraki Review Mer BH ce Smart Switches Feature List 092120 i 42 Microsoft Outlook GE Smart Switches Feature List_20111006 Wi mnuCR 3816 2008 G5 235x series Chipeset data_20110901 xIsx out 201 DYT Re lGs 2326k PYT preparation meeting minutes table_201 ag01 Wi pses 23106_Hw I 1 GS 2348K_G5 2352KX_chipset SPEC xls i pses 23106_HW I E maGE_027 jpg psgs 2352K LED Pi K My Documents My Computer My Network File name Places Files of type fan Files ng Parameter description eo Browse Click the Browse button to search the Configuration URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the configuration from configuration stored location PC or Server 273 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 5 Diagnostics This section provides a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6
134. e 1 Click Protocol based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 7 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found Apply Reset Delete Frame Type Value Group Name Ethernet Etype 0x 0800 Reset 158 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Apply eo Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is valu
135. e port via MAC address Port Security Action To scroll to select when the device wasn t allow to access then switch action as trap shutdown or trap amp shutdown Port Security limit To set the Port security limit the default is 1 Port Security limit To set the Port security limit It means you can set how many device MAC address will allow to access the port the default is 1 Spanning Tree Admin Edge To scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Admin Edge function on the Easy Port Spanning Tree BPDU Guard To scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree BPDU Guard function on the Easy Port Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 209 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 20 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirror in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Port to mirror on which port 3 Scroll to
136. e switches If Hybrid the default value is selected if the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame If Access is selected untag all frames transmitted on the port Port VLAN ID Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4094 The default value is 1 Note The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 149 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 3 Switch Status The function Switch Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN membership status n the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display membership information Figure 3 11 3 The VLAN Membership Status for Combined users VLAN Membership Status lg SN PE ES Port Members veamo 2 2 4 5 5 7 5 9 vo s1 1212 aJu5 06 17 05 19 20 24 22J22 24 25 25 27 28 28 20 3422 324 5 26 27 2020 ao a 42 43 Jaa 45 4547 Jae aa 50 54 52 1 YMIMMMMMMMMMM MMMM MMMM A Parameter description VLAN USER You can scroll to select one kind VLAN user as below VLAN User module use
137. e x Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable ly Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Parameter description General Settings Enable Loop Protection 205 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Port Configuration Port The switch port number of the port e Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only e TX Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 206 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 18 2 Status This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interf
138. e corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security Port Status information by manual 257 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 8 Access Management This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet 4 8 1 Configuration This section shows you how to configure access management table of the Switch The maximum e
139. e in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype Ox0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 NoTE Special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 159 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 7 2 Group to VLAN This section allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN
140. e provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 259 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 8 2 Statistics This section shows you a detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS SSH TELNET and SSH Web Interface To configure an Assess Management Statistics in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 8 2 The Access Management Statistics Refresh Clear Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Parameter description e Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch e Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the Access Management Statistics information by manual Others yo
141. e the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 12 The Storm Control Configuration Port Unicast Frames Broadcast Frames Unknown Frames Enabled Rate i Unit Enabled Rate Unit Enabled Rate Unit O gt y F lt gt y a lt gt y 1 o ao A oo oes e Le a 500 kbps e O sool kbps e O sooi kbps x 0 oee oe E 4 O 500 kbps w 500 kbps w 7 500 kbps w O Eo e Ce INCI oe j ua 500 kbps e O soo kbps e O sooj kbps x 8 a 500 kbps y a 500 kbps w a 500 kbps O Eo o E E kbps Le 0 sooj kbps w I 00 kbps J I 00 kbps a E aa NE o cool kbps 12 46 5001 kbps 500 kbps 500 kbps aT sooj kbps O soo kbps y O 500 kbps x O E ao o ao ole 49 a 500 kbps a 500 kbps w a 500 kbps w SO 800 kbps wf 500 kbps PO 500 kbps x SH soo oes O o o kbps Ce sa o sooj kbps ww
142. eached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section NoTE That clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security information by manual Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 254 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 7 2 Switch Status This section shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on all
143. ecific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no any Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 193 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid dscp value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 194 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 11 QCL Status The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row desc
144. ected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GARP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GARP statistics 2 Scroll which port you want to display the GARP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GARP statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GARP Port Statistics i a A Ea el E EA m a EC me 3 EA ER ei a 38 39 ma g a E el 45 A Ea EA el 50 a 2 Parameter description eo Port The Port coulmn shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown o Peer MAC Peer MAC is MAC address of the neighbour Switch from with GARP frame is received e Failed Count explain Failed count here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GARP Port Statistics information by manual 167 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 13 GVRP GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group membership information of the VLANs The GVRP offers the function providing the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It makes use of GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attribute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end statio
145. ecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer SSID Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication STP Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP SyncE SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This funct
146. ed 227 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Snooping Port Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 228 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 4 DHCP Relay The section describes how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP servers via DHCP relay The DHCP servers may be on another network 4 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Relay setting including Relay Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Server IP setting Relay Information Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Information Mode Policy Replace Keep and Drop Web Interface To configure a DHCP Relay in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Relay Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration 2 Specify Relay Server IP address 3 Select Enabled in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration 4 Specify Relay Replace Keep and Drop in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration 5 Click Apply Figure 4 4 1 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Configuration
147. ed 7 Oly Oly O jaan O Disabled 8 Oly Oly Oly Oly Disabled 9 Oly oj 0 A O jax Disabled 10 oj Oly o jf OL Disabled 171 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 45 O O y O if i O jax Disabled 46 ojx Oly Oly Oly Disabled 47 0 Oly Olw O w Disabled 48 ofz ojx Olw O w Disabled r 49 olz oly oly oly Disabled 50 ofz olx Oolw O w Disabled 51 O o Oly O Disabled F 52 o f ojx Ol 10 Disabled Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority DP level Controls the default DP level e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Apply Click
148. el of the system log entry The following level types are supported Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels o ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time It will display the log record by device time The time of the system log entry o Message It will display the log detail message The message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 23 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 5 3 Detailed Log This section describes that display the detailed log information of the switch Web Interface To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 3 The Detailed System Log Information Parameter description o ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 24 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 SNMP Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed co
149. el the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The I GMP Snooping VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN Snooping IGMP ovina al QRI 0 1 LLAQI 0 1 URI ID Enabled Querier See lee sec sec sec sec 1 Y v Apply Parameter description e VLANID It displays the VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto 0 Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 O QI 92 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response I
150. el7 s s jio a a2 as 14 as te 17 18 15 20 21 22 28 24 25 26 27 28 25 so 31 32 39 34 35 a 37 55 35 an an 42 45 44 as as ar as Jas 50 5152 Static Y DODICIDOD0DO y Dynamic 4 00 0D 81 27 38 F8 v Dynamic 1 0 2008 50 52 D8 v Dynamic t O024ABE0 2C 00 y Dynamic 1 0040 0781 8082 Dynamic 1 00 40 C7 87 66 02 Dynamic t 0940 C7 EF 1 18 y Stato 1 33337000008 Y WN O WO NM OOOO WO ION ON NOOO WWE VO Static 1 ISI y vivo ve ee vv rv ee vv Y Y Static 1 SSSA y Y wi e vw N MEME LINE NL OLI a Static 1 BSSEFPABCOEZ y Viv vw Ve vv Ve ev ww Vvvvv VW ew vv SANA Y MIC od E E ak 1 0 E Parameter description MAC Table Columns e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry eo VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MAC address entries by manual or press clear to clean up the MAC table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table NOTE 00 40 C7 73 01 29 your switch MAC address for IPv4 33 33 00 00 00 01 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Advertisement reference I Pv6 RA J PG 33 33 00 00 00 02 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Solicitation reference IPv6 RS J PG 3
151. eleet alata mejo ojal 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 09 9 9o 0 9 909 9s 9 9 D D yYyy yy yyy yy y yoy yyo s y y y t ssy 64 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Hash Code Contributors e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled eo Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled o IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration e GroupID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port o Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio
152. elow The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally en
153. emoved from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring MLD MVR NAS For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPV 6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs whe
154. en 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 3 8 5 The LLDP Statistics information 131 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Global Counters e Neighbour entries were last changed Shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbours Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full e Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port eo Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbours in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when
155. ent s to build the bandwidth aggregation 3 3 1 1 Static Trunk Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Static Trunk and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members 3 Click the apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 1 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address Address 7 TCPIUDP Port Number Aggregation Group Configuration e alas Tov gel a lato jeu ant mot sal asiayaziaalaatastam gx ae ast sein aa vsizal wei ged al z
156. ent describes the amount of power the PD will require during normal operation e Power Requested The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved Power Allocated The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using eo Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user e Port Status 136 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The Port Status shows the port s status e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the PoE Port information by manual 137 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 9 3 Power Delay This page allows the user to setting the delay time of power providing after device rebooted Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PoE and Power delay 2 Enable the port to the power device 3 Specify the power providing delay time when reboot 4 Click Apply to apply the change Figure 3 9 3 The POE Power Delay Port Delay Mode Delay Time 0 300 sec cm Disable x Disable ww Disable Disable gt Disable w Disable x Disable Disable z
157. eo Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Oo Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states Oo Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication Oo LastID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class 240 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can c
158. eration is disabled CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the ACL status information by manual 63 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 3 Aggregation The Aggregation is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s to build the bandwidth aggregation For example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has 3 3 1 Static Trunk The Aggregation Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipm
159. ere it is 44 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo PoE L2 Plus Managed Switch Location Basically it is the location where this switch is put User defined Contact For easily managing and maintaining device you may write down the contact person and phone here for getting help soon You can configure this parameter through the device s user interface or SNMP Device name The name of the switch User defined System Date Show the system time of the switch Its format day of week month day hours minutes seconds year System up time The time accumulated since this switch is powered up lts format is day hour minute second BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch Firmware version The firmware version in this switch Hardware Mechanical version The version of Hardware and Mechanical The figure before the hyphen is the version of electronic hardware the one after the hyphen is the version of mechanical Serial number The serial number is assigned by the Manufacture 8 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Host IP address The IP address of the switch Host MAC address It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch Subnet Mask Displays the IP subnet mask assigned to the device Gateway IP Address Displays the default gateway IP address assigned to the device Host MAC Address Displays the Ethernet MAC address assigned to the de
160. es to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch Others you could using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch Monitor the ports content or status in the function 3 1 1 Configuration This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and configured Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Configured Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Web Interface To configure an Current Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Configuration 2 Specify the Speed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame size Excessive Collision mode and Power Control 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 1 The Port Configuration 37 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Port Configuration Port Link Speed Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Current Config
161. esh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 4 The Port Detail Statistics Overview Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Rx Q0 Rx Q1 Rx Q2 Rx Q3 Rx Q4 Rx Q5 Rx Q6 Rx Q7 Receive Error Counters Rx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to automatically oooooc9 ce ooooo9ceo ooooooccoce oooooce refresh the Port Statistics Pont E Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Transmit Size Counters Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Transmit Queue Counters Tx Q0 Tx Q1 Tx Q2 Tx Q3 Tx Q4 Tx Q5 Tx Q6 Tx Q7 Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops Tx Late Exc Coll 0000000 000000 00000000o oo information e Upper left scroll bar To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Port 0 Port 1 Receive Total and Transmit Total 43 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad p
162. esh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 110 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information The section describes the user to configure the Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table are shown on this page The MLDv2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv2 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLDv2 Information Table Web Interface To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The I Pv6 SSM Information L a erd Goap 0O VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type Nomore entries Parameter description MLDv2 Information Table Columns e
163. ested sites LO Free Hotmail En 7 El dea Safety Toos E Mi gt Page System Information Help The switch system information is provided here The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location The MAC Address of this switch The Chip ID of this switch 4 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES TWISTED PAIR DEVICES CABLING GUIDELINES The switch is designed to be connected to 10 100 or 1000Mbps network cards in PCs and servers as well as to other switches and hubs It may also be connected to remote devices using optional SFP transceivers Each device requires an unshielded twisted pair UTP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends Use Category 5 5e or 6 cable for LOOOBASE T connections Category 5 or better for 100BASE TX connections The RJ 45 ports on the switch support automatic MDI MDI X pin out configuration so you can use standard straight through twisted pair cables to connect to any other network device PCs servers switches routers or hubs See Appendix B for further information on cabling Y CAUTION Do not plug a phone jack connector into an RJ 45 port This will damage the switch Use only twisted pair cables with RJ 45
164. ete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 30 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 6 Views The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index key are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please check lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 28 Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface Click SNMP Views Click Add new View Specify the SNMP View parameters Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset IRON Figure 2 6 6 The SNMP Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree E zero included 4 Add new view Apply Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree zero included a inclu
165. f choice for most of the Internet IPMC IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host L LACP LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLC The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX to coexist within a multipoint network LLC header consists of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of t
166. for the selected switch Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the web interface 1 Click Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 7 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table L Refresh No Group entries Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN 1D 11 j3ija sjej 3 9 10 1112 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51152 ajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajojajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajaja Parameter description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Apply e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLANID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 o Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping
167. fresh clear You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual 50 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 2 2 Rate Limiters The section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter To specific the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700 To scroll the Unit with pps or kbps Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values akWND Figure 3 2 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt o N a i gt a gt D Parameter description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row o Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or O 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are 51 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert t
168. g a DMAC value appears eo DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX x iS a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value VLAN Parameters VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN 1D filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears e VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1to 4094 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag 55 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al priority is specified tag priority is don t care ARP Parameters The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Request Reply Specify
169. g frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion 44 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Port Detail Statistics or clear them by manual 45 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 1 5 Qos Statistics The section describes that switch could display the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port for the different queues for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Queueing Counters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then QoS Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queueing Counters or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 5 The Queuing Counters Overview Queuing Counters 8 9 Q S El o N g 5 x Tx 200000 gt j ICAIC pb a POO m E CoC Ox 200000 ooo 6556 393 mb q b 00000000 000000000o00o E oo e Joo oo Lu JOO Oo Lo Ble le S8 B e TES IRS IS TS 510018 w mos 00000000 00000000000 Bes es ees esl les Se 00000000 0
170. g in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well 81 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al o Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 82 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 5 MSTI Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports Web Interface To configu
171. g the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this Optional TLVs OUI PCP PD PHY PING ALLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The
172. ghout this manual to show information Warranty See the Customer Support Warranty booklet included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Manufacture Corporation products and replacement parts can be obtained from your Manufacture Corporation Sales and Service Office authorized dealer Disclaimer Manufacture Corporation does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and marks no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Manufacture Corporation disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Manufacture Corporation Manufacture Corporation assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this manual and makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this manual Manufacture Corporation reserves the righter to make improvements to this manual and or to the products described in this User Manual at any time without notice FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the CE FCC remove Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equip
173. guration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping o MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 71 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 3 MSTI Priorities When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active For controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridege Identifier The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities 2 Scroll the Priority maximum is 240 Default is 128 3 Click the apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will
174. he IGMP filtering feature an user can exert this type of control In some network Application environments as like the metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations an user might want to control the multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong It allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report from the port is forwarded for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 2 Click Add new Filtering Group 3 Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering Specify the Filte
175. he attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module o State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain 243 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds o Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the NAS Statistics by manual Others you can click clear to clean up all entries 244 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 6 AAA This section shows you to use an AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for
176. he configure SNMP Access in the web interface Click SNMP Accesses Click Add new Access Specify the SNMP Access parameters Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset nan Figure 2 6 7 The SNMP Accesses Configuration Delet Group Security Security Read View Write View Name Model Level Name Name a zero usm Auth Priv zero zero Delete Group Name Security Model Security Level Read ViewName Write View Name O zero Auth Priv zero zero usm zero any w NoAuth NoPriv None y None Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPvl v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security 33 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defi
177. he stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS M MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network 283 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al MEP MD5 administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are r
178. heduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight 180 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Apply
179. his is helpful while malfunctioning 2 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM System and Information 2 Specify the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click Refresh Figure 2 1 1 System Information GEPOEL2 ESW52XKX for example others model the same 7 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al System Information Auto refresh Model Name GEPoEL2 ESW52x System Description 44 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo PoE L2 Plus Managed Switch Location Contact Device Name GEPoEL2 ESW48K System Date 2011 01 01 00 03 10 System Uptime Od 00 03 10 BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version v1 57 2012 12 06 Hardware Mechanical Version v1 02 41 01 Series Number 033815000015 Host IP Address 192 168 5 171 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Host MAC Address 00 40 c7 75 0a b4 Console Baudrate 115200 RAM Size 128MB Flash Size 16MB Bridge FDB Size 8192 MAC Addresses Transmit Queue 8 queues per port Maximum Frame Size 10056 Fan Speed 8021 rpm 7692 rpm 8021 rpm AC Power 11 92V DC Power ov Temperature 42C 107 6F 37C 98 6F Parameter description Model name The model name of this device System description As it is this tells what this device is H
180. ible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP lf a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column o Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE O Moves the QCE up the list O Moves the QCE down the list 9 Deletes the QCE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings e Port Members 192 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
181. ier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto 0 Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 0 QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Oo QRI 104 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is O to
182. ighbour unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 120 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by System Description System Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit Management Address Management Address is the neighbour unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbour s IP address Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LLDP Neighbours information by manual 121 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end
183. il INTRODUCTION aii 1 CHAPTER 1 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT cococccococccconancnnnanancnncananananananononas 2 CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES cccccnonnccncncnonononononinccononononnnonnnnnonononannannnnnnnnononnnn cnn cnn nn nnnnnnananns 5 TWISTED PAIR DEVICES 00d Ra AA bd e a de 5 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ococncaccccccoconnonononocnonanananananrncnonananananan rn crnnan ana naananannannas 7 2 io YS TEM INFORMATION a liada ada IRA A IA A A AE 7 SS AS A ca cage cisasd sersasaaaoiea aT 7 21 2 CONMQUIQUO acostada iii it a di tds 10 O EE OO 10 EA A A 11 A A A O NAO 12 SE EE AAA A A N n a A a AN a E aa 12 AA NR ATAR A A E A A Sa 14 223 ACCOUNT tt o rd ls oak car ds aa e da AY cas de ld th al E 15 A A E AN 15 2232 PHIVIICQOL OVE iii A A AAA be es 17 OA Pd Marston tit aches oo a e e Sek aM ALE E e oe ME ork AYE es 19 Pe E AA hh ANA 19 PAD AP VO E lola 21 PENSO A a a 22 25M CONNG UIA ON Ni A E EE 22 A 0 E O ON E 23 2 5 3 Detaled LO A A A eevba se Pos 24 OSM Pta A A a LA cocoa a ia 25 DOT SOM AAA A A A aA TEA 25 2 6 2 CONTQUIALION ii A TES 26 2 6 3 COMMUNITIES oooooccccccnccoconcnoncccnnnnnonononaninnnn nono nnnnnnncn cnn nono ona cnn nan cnn conan na aca nan nn ocn a cnn nan a aaa eai 27 A NI A A Pe ECORI REE oS E Toe 28 2 6 5 GIOUDS id A AAA Ria esis inh eit 30 26 6 VICWS A DR BANE eae Oiled oe aes ANE ES A NE i A ol 31 2B 7 ACCESS AD eat eae A TA BORE WEEE AEN BE 33 2 6 8 TAN D ii AA as deeds elev deers hos ina deeded 35
184. ime sec 1 0 0 0 0 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 2 0 0 00 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing 7 15 3 0 0 0 0 30 error 0 total 0 Nothing w hs 4 0 0 0 0 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 5 0 0 0 0 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 6 0 0 0 0 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 7 0 0 00 30 3 enror 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 8 0 0 00 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing w hs 9 0 0 0 0 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing 7 15 10 0 0 0 0 30 3 eror 0 total 0 Nothing 7 15 CL gt _ 3 JO Fear tota omg 42 0 0 0 0 3o 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w hs 43 0 0 0 0 3o 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 44 0 0 0 0 o 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 45 0 0 0 0 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w hs 46 0 0 0 0 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w 15 47 0 0 0 0 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing 15 48 0 0 00 30 3 error 0 total 0 Nothing w hs Parameter description e Ping Check Enable Ping Check function can detects the connection between PoE port and power device Disable will turn off the detection o Port This is the logical port number for this row Ping IP Address The PD s IP Address the system should ping e Interval Time sec 139 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Device will send checking message to PD each interval time Retry Time When PoE port can t ping the PD it will retry to send detection again When the third time it will trigger f
185. imited unlimited unlimited unlimited 7 unlimited unlimited x unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited 00 OO A WD a o unlimited unlimited unlimited x 5 0000000050000 00000 00000 0 00000000000 00000000000 Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered I PMCv6 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMC 6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address Using IPv6 Address range Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port 102 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Fast Leave To evoke to enable the fast leave on the port e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong e Buttons Apply Click to Apply changes Reset Click to undo any
186. ing the Port Security Limit Control functionality e MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients
187. ings User Name Password Password again Privilege Level 1 Parameter description User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User Password To type the password The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Password again To type the password again You must type the same password again in the 15 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al field e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 16 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 3 2 Privilege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snoo
188. ining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Evoke which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type the Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps Click Apply to save the configuration Figure 3 14 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Port Policers Port Mode Rate Unit Flow Control a lt gt v 1 500 kbps 2 500 kbps v 3 500 kbps 4 500 kbps 5 500 kbps 6 500 kbps 7 500 kbps 8 500 kbps v 9 500 kbps 10 500 kbps Parameter description 0 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Enabled To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function o Rate To set the Rate limit value for this port the default is 500 e Unit To scroll to select what unit of rate includes kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps e Flow Control To evoke to enable or disable flow control on port e Buttons 174 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Apply Cli
189. int Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management m LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the p
190. into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TFTP UDP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provide directory service and security features UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capabil
191. ion Web Interface To configure an Port Description in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 2 The Port Configuration Port Description Port Description w 2 3 5 6 7 8 o 10 11 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Description of device ports can not include amp e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset rae to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 40 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 1 3 Traffic Overview The section describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Traffic Overview 2 If you want to auto refresh then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 3 The Port Statistics Overview 41 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Por
192. ionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 y TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host 288 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back
193. isable WRED 3 Key in each Parameter value 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 13 The WRED Configuration Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration Queue Enable Min Threshold Max DP1 Max DP2 Max DP3 0 0 1 5 10 1 0 1 5 10 2 0 1 5 10 3 0 1 5 10 4 0 1 5 10 5 0 1 5 10 Parameter description Queue The queue number QoS class for which the configuration below applies Enable Evoke to enable or disable the WRED function on the switch QoS Queue Min Threshold Controls the lower RED threshold If the average queue filling level is below this threshold the drop probability is zero This value is restricted to 0 100 Max DP1 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 1 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 Max DP2 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 2 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 199 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Oo Max DP3 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 3 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 O Buttons NOTE RED Drop Probability Function The following illustration shows the drop probability functio
194. it when you click on Apply A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you click Apply The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs O Buttons Apply Click to Apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 156 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 6 2 Status This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configured in the web interface 1 Click MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Staic NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 3 11 6 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Port Members 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 3 Parameter description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the MAC based VLAN Memebership information by manual 157 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 7 Pro
195. itional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This 282 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol o
196. its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings 74 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 75 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 4 2 MSTI Mapping When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the V
197. ity to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority V VLAN User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware 289 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames receive
198. lete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next apply Port The logical port for the settings e Allow Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be allowed e Adding New Allow Group Click Add New Allow Group to add a new entry to the Group Allow table Specify the Port and Allow Group of the new entry Click Apply e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 7 3 Groups Information 114 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Groups Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 3 The MVR Groups Information 224 0 0 0 Parameter description MVR Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information a
199. lick them for refresh the NAS Switch Status by manual 241 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 5 3 Port Status The section describes to provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 3 The NAS Statistics L Refresh J Clear Receive EAPOL Counters Transmit EAPOL Counters Total Parameter description Port State e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values 0 Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized 242 Publication date Dec
200. llows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click MAC address based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 6 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Delete MAC Address VLANID 1 26 Currently no entries present Parameter description Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch 155 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address eo VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected switch un
201. lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 lf you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 5 5 The I GMP Snooping Groups Information a Parameter description Navigating the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table IGMP Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 98 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery
202. lues are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side eo Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 There is following configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 eo Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 189 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 9 DSCP Classification The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value Others the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters 3 Click the apply to
203. manual 204 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 18 Loop Protection The loop Protection is used to detect the presence of traffic When switch receives packet s looping detection frame MAC address the same as oneself from port show Loop Protection happens The port will be locked when it received the looping Protection frames 3 18 1 Configuration The section describes how to set Loop Protection Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection 5 Click the apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 1 The Loop Protection Configuration General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable y Transmission Time 5 Shutdown Time 180 Port Configuration Port Enable Action Tx Mode gt a lt gt lt gt lx 1 Shutdown Port Enable w 2 Shutdown Port Enable x 3 Shutdown Port Enable x 4 Shutdown Port Enable x 5 Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable Enable Enable y Shutdown Port NEHER Bee Shutdown Port Enable x Shutdown Port Enable x Shutdown Port Enabl
204. mber of packets that are relayed from client to server Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive from Server The number of packets received from server e Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options e Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing e Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing e Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers e Receive from Client The number of received packets from server e Receive Agent Option 231 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The number of received packets with relay agent information option Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then
205. me Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports 150 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual Gi Note VLAN Priority Voice VLAN gt MAC based VLAN gt Protocol baseded VLAN gt Tag based VLAN 151 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 4 Port Status The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN Port Status in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Status 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 3 11 4 The VLAN Port Status for Static user O Port PVID PortType Ingress Filtering Frame Type 22222 PLPLELPELL ELE SESE SSS HESS EL EL ELE SSS SSS SDSS EEL o dE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
206. ment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications 1 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al FCC Caution CE mark Warning A A To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class A device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures NoTE Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment 11 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Table of Contents PROVISION HSO a o e te al eta he eto dio v
207. ments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation e Server Address 1 and 2 Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server 1 and server 2 For redundancy If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors 22 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 5 2 Log This section describes that display the system log information of the switch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 2 The System Log configuration Refresh Clear 1 lt lt J lt lt gt gt gt gt 1 2011 01 01 08 00 11 Switch just made a warm boot 2011 01 01 08 00 19 Link up on port 33 2011 01 01 08 01 32 Login passed for user admin 2011 01 01 08 01 47 Management IP address was changed 2011 01 01 08 03 30 Login passed for user admin 2011 01 01 08 12 15 User admin logout Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Level lev
208. n 252 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 45 Disabled 4 lone vy Disabled reopen 46 Disabled 4 one v Disabled Reopen 47 Disabled 4 one v Disabled Reopen 48 Disabled 4 None v Disabled Reopen 49 Disabled 4 one v Disabled Reopen 50 Disabled 4 one v Disabled Reopen 51 Disabled 4 lone v Disabled Reopen 52 Disabled 7 4 lone v Disabled Reopen Parameter description System Configuration e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limi
209. n click them for refresh the Port Security Switch Status information by manual 256 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 7 3 Port Status This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 3 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 1 Pott Y Autoretesh CJ MAC Address VLANID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description e MAC Address VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed Oo State Indicates whether th
210. n of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 5 1 Basic Configuration The section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable which Global configuration 3 Evoke which port wants to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function 4 Scroll to set the Throtting parameter 5 Click the apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 1 The I GM
211. n service if required 3 Click Apply Figure 2 4 2 The I Pv6 configuration IPv6 Configuration Configured Current Auto Configuration Y Renew E z c0a8 0101 A Edo Link Local Address fe80 0240 c7fffe75 0ab4 Prefix 96 96 Gateway E x Reset Parameter description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Prefix Provide the Pv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the Pv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups
212. n the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 4 2 2 The Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address LApply Reset Delete Port VLAN ID Delete MAC Address Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Apply e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 223 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 2 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and ent
213. n with associated parameters Drop Probability 100 Max DP 3 Max DP 2 Max DP 1 Average Filling Level Min Threshold 100 Max DP 1 3 is the drop probability when the average queue filling level is 100 Frames marked with Drop Precedence Level O are never dropped Min Threshold is the average queue filling level where the queues randomly start dropping frames The drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level n increases linearly from zero at Min Threshold average queue filling level to Max DP n at 100 average queue filling level Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 200 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 15 s Flow Agent The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 1 Collector is supported This page allows for configuring sFlow collector IP type sFlow collector IP Address Port Number for each sFlow Collector 3 15 1 Collector The Current field displays the currently configured sFlow Collector The Configured field displays the new Collector Configuration Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent Collector 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to IP Type to choice with IPv4 or IPv6 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to
214. nal Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN Port Status information by manual 153 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 11 5 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 11 5 1 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises configuring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on an data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding
215. net Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD HTTP HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition t
216. nfigured through its own GUI Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Voice VLAN Configuration 2 Specify VLAN ID Aging Time Traffic Class 4 Specify Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol in the Port Configuration 5 Click Apply Figure 3 12 1 The Voice VLAN Configuration Mode Disabled y VLANID 1000 Aging Time 86400 seconds Traffic Class 7 High y Port Mode Security a lt gt 7 lt gt z lt gt Disabled w Disabled 7 OUI Disabled w Disabled e OUI Disabled Disabled 7 OUI Disabled w Disabled OUI Disabled w Disabled OUI Disabled w Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled 7 OUI Disabled w Disabled x oui Disabled Disabled e OUI Disabled w Disabled oui Disabled OUI Disabled x OU Disabled x OUI Disabled x OU Disabled 7 OUI Disabled x OUI Disabled x Disabled e oOMON DH amp WH a o 45 Disabled 46 Disabled v 47 Disabled v 48 Disabled w 49 Disabled v 50 Disabled v Disabled x Disabled 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 HHHHHHHH Ed EN EE ENE ED EDEN ET 4 162 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al
217. ng date and the ending date For example if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour When the time passes over the starting time the system time will be increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over And when the time passes over the ending time the system time will be decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over The switch supports valid configurable day light saving time is 5 5 step one hour The zero for this parameter means it need not have to adjust current time equivalent to in act daylight saving You don t have to set the starting ending date as well If you set daylight saving to be non zero you have to set the starting ending date as well otherwise the daylight saving function will not be activated Time Set Offset Provide the Daylight saving time set offset The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 1 to 1440 minutes default is 60 mins Daylight Savings Type Provide the Daylight savings type selection You can select By Dates or Recurring two type for Daylight saving type From To configure when Daylight saving start date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM To To configure when Daylight saving end date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM Gi Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 13 Publication date Dec 2012
218. ng quality of service QoS bandwidth latency and high performance Web Interface To configure the Easy Port in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Easy Port 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to Role for what kind device you want to set on the Easy Port and connect to 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 19 1 The Easy Port Configuration Parameter description Port Members To evoke which Port wants to enable the Easy Port function Role To scroll to select what kind device you want to connect and implement with the Easy Port setting Access VLAN To set the Access VLAN ID it means the switch port access VLAN ID AVID VLAN Mode To scroll to select the VLAN mode with Access Trunk or Hybrid Voice VLAN If you connect the IP Phone you need to assign the Voice VLAN ID The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box 208 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Traffic Class To scroll to select the traffic class for the data stream priority The available value from 0 Low to 7 High If you want the voice has high priority then you can set the value with 7 Port Security To scroll to enable or disable the Port Security function on the Port If you turn on the function then you need to set Port Security limit to allow how many device can access th
219. ning the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 34 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 8 Tarp The function is used to configure SNMP trap To create a new trap account please check lt No number gt button and enter the trap information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 6 Web Interface To configure SNMP Trap setting 1 Click SNMP Trap 2 Display the SNMP Trap Hosts information table 3 Choice a entry to display and modify the detail parameters or click delete button to delete the trap hosts entry Figure 2 6 8 The SNMP Trap Host Configuration z Severity Security Authentication Privacy Delete No Version Server IP UDP Port Community Security Name Syel Level Protocol Protocol 192 168 1 249 162 public Info 192 168 1 249 162 zero Info Auth Priv MD5 DES Trap Version v2c v Server IP 192 168 1 249 UDP Port 162 Community Security Name public Severity Level m E Security Level NoAuth NoPri 7 Authentication Protocol MD5 y Authentication Password Privacy Protocol DES Privacy Password Parameters description
220. ns IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP Arouter sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers add
221. ns With GID information and GIP GVRP state machine maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagate these information to other GVRP aware devices to setup and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and through which ports these members can be reached 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GVRP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GVRP configure 2 Specify GVRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 13 1 The GVRP Global Configuration GVRP Mode 28338535 onnon Disable y GVRP rrole Disable w Disable Disable x Disable x Disable w Disable x Disabl Disable Disal Disable x Disable y Disable y Disable y Disable y ble ble x e y Disabl Disable Disable y Disable y Disable v Disable y Disable y Disable y Disable y Disable y Disable Disable Parameter description 168 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al GVRP Mode GVRP Mode is a global setting to enable the GVRP globally select Enable from menu and to
222. nt w 3 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant Ka 4 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 5 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 6 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant T 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 8 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 9 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN e normal participant 10 200 600 10000 GVRP vLAN w normal participant 165 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 41 200 600 10000 GVRP vLAN normal participant 42 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN aw normal participant 43 200 600 10000 GVRP v VLAN uw normal participant 44 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 45 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN v normal participant 46 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 47 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 48 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 49 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN x normal participant _ 50 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant w 51 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant v 52 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant Parameter description Port The Port column
223. nterval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Or click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Others click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 93 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes how to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering With t
224. ntry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Web Interface To configure a Access Management Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration Click Add new entry 2 3 Specify the Start IP Address End IP Address 4 Checked Access Managemnet method HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH in the entry 5 Click Apply Figure 4 8 1 The Access Management Configuration Mode Dsaes 7 Delete StartIP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Add new entry Apply Reet Mode Disabled 7 Parameter description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address 258 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address rang
225. o configure a Save Start Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save Start 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 2 The Save Start configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Start Configuration 269 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 3 3 Save User This section describes how to save users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save User Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 3 The Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Backup Configuration 270 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 3 4 Restore User This section describes how to restore users information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Web Interface To configure a Restore User Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restore User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 4 The Restore the Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to restore the Backup Configuration to the switch 271 Publication date Dec
226. o previously saved values 52 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 2 3 Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed an the priority is highest Web Interface To configure Access Control List in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list To specific the parameter of the AC
227. o the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange 281 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al ICMP ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactio
228. of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V1 Leaves Received The number of Received V1 Leaves Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 108 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 5 Group Information The section describes user could set the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups information Figure 3 6 5 The MLD Snooping Groups Information MLD Snooping Groups Information Auto refresh O Start from VLAN 1 and group addres
229. of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 21 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 5 Syslog The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the system log and provide a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configure Syslog configuration in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Syslog 2 Specify the syslog parameters includes IP Address of Syslog server and Port number 3 Evoke the Sylog to enable it 4 Click Apply Figure2 5 1 The System Log configuration System Log Configuration Server Mode Enabled y Server Address 1 192168 1 249 Server Address 2 Syslog Level Info M Apply Reset Parameter description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledg
230. om S ports Custom Ethertype enables the user to change the Ethertype value on a port to any value to support network devices that do not use the standard 0x8100 148 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Ethertype field value on 802 1Q tagged or 802 1p tagged frames Port This is the logical port number of this row Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Egress Rule Configures the Port Egress Rule The allowed values are Hybric Trunk or Access This parameter affects VLAN egress processing If Trunk is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN awar
231. on Port LACP Enabled Yy ci om Qi Nh b h ab b ab b n e w N a OO lt gt Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Key 66 Scroll the Role with Active or Passive Default is Active Click the apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Role lt gt Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active A 4 v JEJEJE 4 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 45 Auto MA Active v 46 Auto MA Active v 47 Auto kA Active 48 Auto Active 49 Auto z Active 50 Auto v Active 51 Auto MA Active 52 Auto v Active Parameter description o Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the phy
232. on Al 3 9 2 Status This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports The section show all port Power Over Ethernet Status Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Status in the web interface 1 Click Status 2 Display Power Over Ethernet Status Information 3 Click Refresh Figure 3 9 2 The Power Over Ethernet Status Local Port PDclass PowerRequested Power Allocated PowerUsed CurrentUsed Priority Port Status 1 0 om om ow 0 mA High No PD detected 2 0 om om 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected 3 0 om om om 0 mA Low NoPD detected 4 0 01M om 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected 5 0 om 01M ow 0 mA Low NoPD detected 6 0 01M om 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected rf 0 01M om 01M 0 mA Low NOPD detected 8 0 01M om om 0 mA Low NoPD detected 9 0 om 01M om 0 mA Low NOPD detected 10 0 om om om 0 mA Low NoPD detected 40 0 01M om 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected 41 0 om om 01M 0 mA Low No PD detected 42 0 om 01M 01M 0 mA Low No PD detected 43 0 om 01M 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected 44 0 01M 01M 01M 0 m Low No PD detected 45 0 01M 01M om 0 mA Low No PD detected 46 0 01M 01M 01M 0 mA Low NoPD detected 47 0 om om ow 0 mA Low No PD detected 48 0 01M om 01M 0 mA Low No PD detected Total om 01M om 0 mA Parameter description e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row e PD Class To display the PD Power class that identify with a specified current The classification curr
233. on group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP port status information by manual 70 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 3 3 2 4 The LACP Statistics aeeEeeEe Ssosoeossoosoco SpOarSssssscs o o o oc cs coooso sososcosooos soesossososcososossosocscos cPo cocs oc ccsoc coP oPs ccsco cosoo n 2 ca 5 6 ia 8 10 11 2 13 rs 15 EEES m 18 ig 20 EST 24 ml 26 me m 29 pes 32 Es 34 35 36 37 E E 40 I 43 T 46 48 49 50 E 52 Parameter description eo Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each
234. on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port o TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Soanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the STP Statistics information or clear by manual 88 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 IGMP Snooping The function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping can not tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the informatio
235. oper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signalling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude
236. or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry e Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Apply e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 143 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 10 2 Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Web Interface To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface 1 Click Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display MAC Address Table Figure 3 9 2 The Dynamic MAC Address Table information MAC Address Table a E i J gt J Start from VLAN and MAC address 22 22 win2 entres cer page Port Members Type VLAN MAC Address cul 2 3 4 sf
237. or the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 129 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the
238. ore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only o Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 211 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 21 Trap Event Severity The function is used to set a Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send out the trap information while pre defined trap events occurred Web Interface To configure the Trap Event Severity Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level 3 Click the apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 21 1 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Severity Level i Debug N 3 Warning Warning Warning Warning In Warning y Warning y Warning Info Info nfo w Warning i Info y Fa 3 SLL Shs Silo i Parameter description e Group Name The field describe the Trap Event defernition 212 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Severity Level To scroll to select the event type with Emerg Alert Crit Error Warming Notice Info and Debug e Button
239. ort is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited us
240. other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target 285 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al PoE PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply Policer POP3 A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POPS is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the ser
241. ould have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 2 4 1 IPV4 The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Web Interface To configure an IP address in the web interface 1 Click System IP Configuration 2 Specify the IPv4 settings and enable DNS proxy service if required 3 Click Apply Figure 2 4 1 The IP configuration Configured Current DHCP Client Renew IP Address 192 168 5171 192168 5 171 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID Ja DNS Server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DNS Proxy Reset 19 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non
242. ource MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Apply e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 219 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 1 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Address and entrie per page 2 Checked Auto reflash Figure 4 1 3 The Dynamic Table Port VLANID IP Address MAC Address No more entres Parameter description eo Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP address of the entry MAC Address Source MAC address e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table by manual others for next up page or entry 220 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 2 ARP Inspection The section describes to configure
243. owing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 2 The Port Security Switch Status User Module Name Abbr L 8 D v Port 1 2 3 4 5 E 39 40 Sl 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Parameter description e User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table 0 Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are O Port 255 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows
244. p page or entry 116 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 8 LLDP The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 8 1 LLDP Configuration You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters the settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP 1 Click LLDP configuration 2 Modify LLDP timing parameters 3 Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages 4 Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages 5 Click Apply Figure 3 8 1 The LLDP Configuration Tx Interval 30 Tx Hold Tx Delay Tx Reinit Optional TLVs a I dare Deac nane Deed Pa rra s lt x o E E O E T 1 Disabled w ia Y Y 2 Disable
245. partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch The format is Switch ID Port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP System status information by manual 68 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 3 2 3 Port Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 3 3 2 3 The LACP Status Parameter description eo Port The switch port number eo LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP 69 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregati
246. phical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US eo State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district eo City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighbourhood Neighbourhood block o Street Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction 124 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW eo Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e Ho
247. ping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels form 1 to 15 Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure2 3 2 The Privilege Level configuration Group Name Privilege Levels Account Aggregation Diagnostics Easyport h ib olo 06 4 4 i a lallallallallalla 414114114 114114 3 4 3lelealala 4114 4 4 o k A E 10 k A v mb ojo 4 alla b lle ojjoljojjojjo lala f o 4 14 4 4 o 4 4 mb o bh o 4 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dotlx port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance System Reboot Sy
248. ply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter 1D Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Copy Select which port frames are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Re
249. port 71 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the LACP port statistics information or clear by manual 72 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest
250. r information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Users in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 2 6 4 The SNMP Users Configuration Auth Priv Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly e Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are 28 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al None No authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists Tha
251. r x Disabled 50 Disabled Receiver Disabled lx 51 Disabled z Receiver Disabled iy 52 Disabled w Receiver w Disabiea w Parameter description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR e VLANID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 113 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 7 2 MVR Port Group Allow Configuration The section describes user could add the IP Multicast Group which allowed to receive the multicast stream Entries in the MVR port group allow table is shown on this page The MVR Port Group Table is sorted first by port and then by IP address Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Port Groups Allow 2 If you want to add the new allowed group you need to click the Add new Allow Group button 3 Evoke the Port No Start Address and End Address 3 To click the Apply to apply the configuration of MVR Port Group Allow Table Figure 3 7 2 The MVR Groups Information Delete Port Start Address End Address Delete Port Start Address End Address 112 Apply Reset Parameter description e De
252. r Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o A The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are o A The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The
253. r attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Oo Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time 234 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADI US Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS at
254. r the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a pro
255. r the GEPOEL2 ESW52X has been finished configuration the it interface you can browse it For instance type_http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will show the following screen and ask you inputting username and password in order to login and access authentication The default username is admin and password is empty For the first time to use please enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the GEPOEL2 ESW52X will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but safer In the GEPOEL2 ESW52X it supports a simple user management function allowing only one administrator to configure the system at the same time If there are two or more users using administrator s identity it will allow the only one who logins first to configure the system The rest of users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system For those who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system There are only a maximum of three users able to login simultaneously in the GEPOEL2 ESW52X NOTE When you login the Switch WEB to manager You must first type the Username of the admin Password was blank so when you type after the end Username please press enter Management page to enter WEB When you login GEPOEL2 ESW52X serie
256. re are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column 195 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Resolve Conflict Click it to resolve the confict issue Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the QCL information by manual 196 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 12 Storm Control The section allows user to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configur
257. re hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NFS NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model 284 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al NTP OAM NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizin
258. re the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports 2 Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port 3 Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports 4 Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration 5 Click the apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 5 The MSTI Port Configuration Select N v MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Path Cost A Vv S o S o dl SEE 5518 gt S o N gt S o y e gt 5 o N 00 o MON OO FF WH S o E o x 00 o 3 o y co 83 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al gt o gt o gt o gt Auto Auto ly Auto ly Auto ly Auto w Auto ly Auto ly Auto ly gt o Parameter description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port o Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topolog
259. revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 3 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration MSTI Priority gt CIST 32768 MSTI1 2768 MSTI2 2768 MSTI3 2768 MSTI4 32768 MSTIS 32768 MSTI6 32768 MSTI7 32768 Parameter description MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The 78 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 79 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 4 CIST Ports When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance You need to configure the CIST Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports 2 Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration 3 Evoke to enable or disable the STP then scoll and evoke to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5
260. revious Generic Endpoint Class 1 and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory oa fF U N 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than f
261. rget IP address in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation e ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings O ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care eo RARP DMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware 56 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al address field THA settings O RARP frames where THA is not equal to the DMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the DMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e 1P Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet 0x06 or the PLN is not equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to Pv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care O IP Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings O ARP RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Any
262. ribes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QCL Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Scroll to select the combined static Voice VLAN and conflict 4 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information Figure 3 14 11 The QoS Control List Status Combined v Auto Resolve Conflict User QCE Frame Type Port szi Conflict Class DP DSCP Static 2 Any 2 4 7 8 104 10B Class 2 Default Default No Static 1 Any 5 10B Class 0 Default Default No Parameter description eo User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 0xFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content The
263. rie per page 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 2 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table LI Refresh I lt lt gt gt Pott e MAN Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address Nomoreentries Parameter description eo Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table by manual others for next up page or entry 224 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 3 DHCP Snooping The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network 4 3 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Snooping setting including Snooping Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Mode Configuration Trusted Untrusted Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration 2 Select Trusted of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 3 1 The DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled Port Mode
264. ring Groups in the blank field 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 3 The I GMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Apply Rese Delete Port Filtering Groups 3 224 1 1 10 T Dete 11 e Apply Reset Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port To evoke the port enable the IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering function 94 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Adding New Filtering Group Click Adding New Filtering Group to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry Click Apply O Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 95 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 5 4 Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration then you could to let the switch display the IGMP Snooping Status The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you
265. role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort Backup Port RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled 86 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al CI ST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Port status information by manual 87 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 8 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration then you could to let the switch display the STP Statistics The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 8 The STP Statistics L Refresh Clear Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal Port Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted
266. rrectly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field SNMP Enable SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable SNMP agent will be de activated the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored 2 6 1 System This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click lt Apply gt button the setting takes effect Web Interface To display the configure SNMP System in the web interface Click SNMP System Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function Specify the Engine ID Click Apply APUN
267. rrently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Bridges status information by manual 85 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 7 Port Status After you complete the STP configuration the you could to ask the switch display the STP Port Status The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 7 The STP Port status NAO TOS BA 5 SPs E 108 fe ft es AE e Gm fe a el eee a ee e bate Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port CIST Role The current STP port
268. rt configuration o Port The port number to which the configuration applies e Policy ld The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 127 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 8 4 LLDP MED Neighbours This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbor 1 Click LLDP MED Neighbor 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 9 4 The LLDP MED Neighbours information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Auto refresh C No LLDP MED neighbour information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbour information found Parameter description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in
269. s Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 213 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 22 SMTP Configuration The function is used to set a Alarm trap when the switch alarm then you could set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Web Interface To configure the SMTP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration SMTP Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Severity Level 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 1 The SMTP Configuration Mail Server User Name Password Severity Level Sender Return Path Email Address 1 Email Address 2 Email Address 3 Email Address 4 Email Address 5 Email Address 6 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page e Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email e Username Specify the username on the mail server e Password Specify the password on the mail server e Sender To set the mail sender name e Return Path To set the mail return path as sender mail address e Email Address 1 6 214 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Email address that would like to receive the alarm mess
270. s 100 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLANID Groups 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 27 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 40 49 50 51 52 No more entries Parameter description Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping Information Table Columns eo VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group 109 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refr
271. s services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on sa
272. s switch Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 above Netscape V7 1 above or FireFox V1 00 above and have the resolution 1024x768 The switch supported neutral web browser interface 2 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al NOTE O AS GEPOEL2 ESW52X the function enable dhcp so If you do not have DHCP server to provide ip addresses to the switch the Switch default ip 192 168 1 1 Figure 1 The login page Connect to 192 168 20 15 The server 192 168 20 15 at GEPOEL2 ESWS52KX requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin i Password C Remember my password O Note If you need to configuration the function or parameter then you can refer the detail in the User Guide Or you could access to the Switch and click the help under the web GUI and the switch will pop up the simple help content to teach you how to set the parameters 3 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al GEPOEL2 ESW52X web help function System Information Help Windows Interne Ex O gt lt le http 1192 168 20 22 help help_sys htm Ea ox Snagit ES x B Jr Favorites 5 UU sugg
273. sabled KA Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period EAPOL Timeout Aging Period Hold Time RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Admin State Go Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled Port State Es M a O O 1 Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled 2 Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled 3 Force Authorized _ x Globally Disabled 4 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 5 Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled 6 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 7 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 8 Force Authorized Globally Disabled wise rre Dir y Crees 48 Force Authorized Y 49 Force Authorized Y 50 Force Authorized 51 Force Authorized Y 52 Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled a ENE EES 233 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used
274. se les 258 AB 2 SIAlIStICS A care Soak A A late deeded hn eee ae 260 Ae OSS a EE E E TE A A tevadtatceauaneat Monit rvtuanath Sonaatuathanath tonwatacecunaath EA hensahae ter 261 O O 262 VA AUTHA METRO tata aa a a n a aeaa 263 CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE ccocococococococococococonocococonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananananass 264 5 1 RESTART DEVICE Sui id a A azi 264 5 2 FIRMWARE Ss ii AA aaa 265 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade comio A TEE Ean A Aa ia aE aita 265 5 2 2 Firmware Selecti0N ccccccccececeeeceeeeeeecececeeeeececeseeseeseseceseeeeesesesesesesececeseseseceeeeeseeeceeeseeeeeeese 266 5 3 SAVE RESTORE 00 AAA AAA A 268 523 1 Factory Detalla ii ia iia 268 DAVOS MEA A io loe o ad ha 269 v Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al BSS SAVE ISOM esse a AE EEEE ad Sh fA a A at A oaks ee a LEN 270 5234 OSITO O E is ce2 lA EA E INEA A EE 271 DA EXPORTA IMPOR Tia A Rd badd lelivades 272 524 1 EXPO COMO PPEP A AA A A T 272 542 POL CON Qi ias vides nse aa sass A A ada 273 5 5 DIA CNO TIOS A A AA E A 274 BDA PING RR TT 274 529 2 PINGG iii A AAA AAA A EEEE A e Tit 276 DEDOS MERA Y ii A A A AA Rn ree Sar 277 A GLOSSARY OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT c csssssseseeeceeeensnnssaeeeseeeensnnsseaneeseesensnnsseaees 278 OPORTO EEO ORT PCO REED EOE TET ada ada SATE ET ETO SET EL Om 278 Odd ta ada sibs vince ga dette deste anda NA A AAA E Aas 279 A O O AE 279 E AARTO AAS TE TTS PTE TNT 281 O O an Perera pra ere eres 281 lt 28
275. seconds Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors 118 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors Oo CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP sta
276. sical link speed 10Mb 1 LOOMb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 67 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 3 2 2 System Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP System Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP System Status Figure 3 3 2 2 The LACP System Status O Res Aggr ID Partner Partner Last Local SystemID Key Changed Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description eo lt AggrID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the
277. stem Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group 18 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 4 IP IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which w
278. t The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the Port Statistics information by manual Others click Clear to clean up all Port Statistics 42 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 1 4 Detailed Statistics The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Web Interface To Display the per Port Port detailed Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Detailed Port Statistics 2 Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the detailed Port statistics overview 3 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refr
279. t Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 100 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 6 MLD Snooping Curiously enough a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it Note however that in an application like desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two characters of the address are multicast addresses and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine
280. t means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 29 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 6 5 Groups The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index key are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 2 6 5 The SNMP Groups Configuration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name E usm zero zero Delete Security Model E usm usm zero Apply Parameter description e Del
281. t Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are o Port The port number to which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port o Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number 253 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports
282. t VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Oo Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authen
283. t performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested 3 14 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports And the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the web interface Click Configuration QoS Port Classification Scroll to select QoS class DP Level PCP and DEI parameters Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values APUN Figure 3 14 1 The QoS Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoSclass DPlevel PCP DEI Tag Class DSCP Based z lt gt v lt gt i lt gt m lt gt 1 1 o ojx o j O jax Disabled 2 Oly O y O 48 O 7 Disabled 3 ojx 0 oly O w Disabled 4 ojx ojx o j o j Disabled 5 Oly ojx O jf O jum Disabled 6 0 0 y O jf i O Disabl
284. table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o A The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Oo Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero 247 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 248 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 6 2 Radius Overview This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers status to ensure the function is workable Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto reflash Figure 4 6 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Retesh IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 IP Address 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 Parameter description
285. tching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged 54 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame MAC Parameters e SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears e SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX x is a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value e DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for enterin
286. tection group as defined in G 8031 Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link C cc CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP CDP is an acronym for Cisco
287. ter can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block in
288. the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table 4 2 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 2 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration Disabled abl Mita 5 Dias 2 L et Dias 221 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Parameter description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 222 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 2 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration i
289. the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears e ICMP Code Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is Oto 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value TCP UDP Parameters TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears e TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE
290. the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You ca
291. the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port link Status by manual 39 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 1 2 Port Description The section describes to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking applicat
292. ticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress eo Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS Configuration by manual 239 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 5 2 Switch Status The section describes to show the each port NAS status information of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure a NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 2 The Network Access Server Switch Status Port Admin State PortState LastSource LastID Qo Class Port VLAN ID 1 Force Authored Global Disabled 2 Force Authoreed Globally Disabled 4 ForeAuthorzed Globally Disabled 5 Force Authorzed Global Disabled 1 Foros Authored Globally Disstled R Eara bitharnad Alahalh Nieshlad 4 Force Autharzed Globally Disabled 41 Foros Authored Gotaly Disabled 42 Force Authored Giobsly Disabled 44 Force Authorized Globally Dissbled EE Forehand Geb Parameter description
293. tion describes how to upgrade Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Switch Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select firmware in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 2 1 The Firmware update SE Browse Upload Parameter description Oo Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the firmware from firmware stored location PC or Server Note This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Uploading software will update all managed switches to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches restart the switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 265 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 5 2 2 Firmware Selection Due to the switch supports
294. tistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded 0 Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted eo Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted e Mgmt Addr
295. to Apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Note DP level Every incoming frame is classified to a Drop Precedence Level DP level which is used throughout the device for providing congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific DP level PCP PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag 172 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Actual PCP is Pri column in Vlan tag packet DEI is cfi column PCP value from 0 7 it can be used for priority definition DEI value is O or 1 it is settable map to DP value is O or 1 When ingress Qos class value is the same then through DP level value to define the priority DP value larger will be dropped first ex From Port 1 input 1G Pkts Egress Port 7 Rate be set with 500M Port 1 Pkts will includes two kinds packet a PCP DEI 00 via configured map to Qos class DP level 1 0 b PCP amp DEl 01 via configured map to Qos class DP level 1 1 Result will find a Packet all past and b packets all drop 173 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 14 2 Port Policing This section provides an overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constra
296. to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 73 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Figure 3 4 1 The STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Max Age Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering a Edge Port BPDU Guard a Port Error Recovery O Port Error Recovery Timeout _ Parameter description Basic Settings e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute
297. tocol based VLAN This section describe Protocol based VLAN The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Sub network Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 11 7 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected switch Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interfac
298. tributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADI US Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1 X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed b
299. tring length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 10 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 1 3 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information CPU Load 2 Display the CPU Load on the screen 3 Click Auto refresh Figure 2 1 3 CPU Load 100ms 0 Isec 3 10sec 3 all numbers running average Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically O NoTE The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 11 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision Al 2 2 Time This page teaches user how to configure the switch Time Time configure is including Time Configuration and NTP Configuration 2 2 1 Manual The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you
300. truder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation DSCP Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes 280 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al E EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS EPS is an abbreviation for Ether
301. tting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 1 The MVR Configuration 00 NOMA WH y mb b b b w N O Disabled 100 Immediate Leave gt Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled 4 Receiver EA Disabled Disabled Receiver iy 4 Disabled Disabled 4 Receiver z Disabled Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled y Receiver Disabled Disabled x Receiver Disabled Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled KAKAK Receiver Disabled Disabled Receiver x Disabled Disabled Receiver gt Disabled ENN YH HOD EEE 112 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Disabled Receiver Disabled iy Disabled x Receiver Disabled iy 42 Disabled x Receiver Disabled 43 Disabled x Receiver x Disabled gt 44 Disabled x Receiver Disabled 45 Disabled Receiver Disabled r 46 Disabled Receiver Disabled i 47 Disabled Receiver Disabled z 48 Disabled Receiver Disabled iy 49 Disabled Receive
302. u can click the clear button to clean up all entries 260 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 9 SSH This section shows you to use SSH Secure SHell to securely access the Switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Web Interface To configure a SSH Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of SSH Configuration 2 Click Apply Figure 4 9 1 The SSH Configuration Mode Enabled Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 261 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 4 10 HTTPs This section shows you how to use HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure a HTTPS Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the Automatic Redirect of HTTPS Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 10 1 The HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Configuration Mode Enabled Automatic Redirect Dis
303. u to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 4 7 1 Limit Control This section shows you to to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of System Configuration 2 Checked Aging Enabled 3 Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration 2 Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration 3 Set Ation Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown 4 Click Apply Figure 4 7 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Mode Disabled M Aging Enabled Aging Period 3600 seconds Port Mode Limit Action State Re open ag lt gt lt gt x 1 Disabled 7 4 None y Disabled Reopen 2 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 3 Disabled 4 None y Disabled Reopen 4 Disabled w 4 None Disabled Reopen 5 Disabled 4 None y Disabled Reope
304. ured CurrentRx CurrentTx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control gt lt gt Ly lt gt lt gt v 1 Down Auto LY 3G x a 10056 Discard y Disabled za 2 O Down greed i x x 10056 Discard 7 Disabled za 3 O Down besa et K xe 10056 Discard Disabled y 4 O Down 100Mbps HDX x x 10056 Discard Disabled y 5 Down pros ig x x 10056 Discard y Disabled w 6 Down Auto y x x C 10056 Discard y Disabled Ya ig O Down Auto z x x O 10056 Discard Disabled y 8 Dom Auto 52 x i 10056 Discard Disabled y 9 Oo Down Auto y x x a 10056 Discard y Disabled Zs 1w Down Auto iy x x a 10056 Discard Disabled y 11 O Down Auto z x x 10056 Discard Disabled CA 12 Down Auto z K x 10056 Discard v Disabled Y 13 o Down Auto y x x O 10056 Discard Disabled AA 14 Down Auto 7 SG e 10056 Discard Disabled Za 15 O Down Auto Ea x x O 10056 Discard y Disabled Ya 16 Down Auto z x x O 10056 Discard Disabled Za 17 o Down Auto z x x 10056 Discard Disabled x 18 Down Auto x x a 10056 Discard y Disabled Ya 19 Down Auto Ly x x 10056 Discard Disabled Za 20 Down Auto y x x 10056 Discard Disabled y 21 Down Auto Lz 3G x a 10056 Discard y Disabled a 22 O Down Auto y x x 10056 Discard Disabled Za 23 o Down Auto z x x 10056 Discard Disabled y 24 O Down Auto Ea x x la 10056 Discard y Disabled Za 40 O Down Auto Za x x E 10056 Discard v Disabled
305. use no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing eo Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 e Building Building structure Example Low Library eo Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which 125 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Impr
306. utomatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next up page or entry 115 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 7 4 Statistics The section describes the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured MVR on the switch It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information Web Interface To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 4 The MVR Statistics Information VLAN ID V1 Reports V2 Reports V3Reports V2Leaves Received Received Received Received 100 0 0 0 0 Parameter description eo VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next u
307. ved It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links 123 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Coordinates Location e Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance eo Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geogra
308. ver IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both Private VLAN PTP QCE QCL QL In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in
309. vice Console Baudrate Displays the baudrate of RS232 COM port RAM Size Displays the RAM size of the system 9 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 1 2 Configuration You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information Configuration 2 Write System Contact System Name System Location information in this page 3 Click Apply Figure 2 1 2 System Information configuration System Information Configuration System Contact System Name GEPoEL2 ESW52X System Location Parameter description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 eo System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed s
310. what multicast address to use Note that this is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Listener MLD host a uy Oana Source NEL ol O T MLD host 3 6 1 Basic Configuration The section will let you understand how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Global configuration parameters Evoke the port to join Router port and Fast Leave 3 Scroll to select the Throtting mode with unlimited or 1 to 10 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 6 1 The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 101 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al Global Configuration O Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled MLD SSM Range fi3e Proxy Enabled E Port Router Port Fast Leave Throttling gt unlimited x unl
311. y of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 84 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 3 4 6 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration the you could to ask the switch display the Bridge Status The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 6 The STP Bridges status STP Bridges Auto refresh _ Refresh Root Topology Topology wees br 1D Port Cost Flag Change Last CIST 80 00 00 40 C7 75 0A B4 80 00 00 40 C7 75 0A B4 0 Steady Parameter description o MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the cu
312. zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network 20 Publication date Dec 2012 Revision Al 2 4 2 IPV6 This section describes how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration And the Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Web Interface To configure Management IPv6 of the switch in the web interface 1 Click System IPv6 Configuration 2 Specify the IPv6 settings and enable Auto Configuratio

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MANUAL DO USUÁRIO ESTEIRA KIKOS TS 5168 I  1 54 CP 01/DCPV/10/C  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file